OI XPE Analytical Balances en

Operating Instructions Excellence Analytical Balances
XPE Models
ww
w.m
t.co
m
METTLER TOLEDO
XPE
20
4
Sta
F ticDet
ect
F
Table of Contents
1 Introduction 11
1.1 The following conventions apply to these operating instructions 11
2 Safety Information 12
2.1 Explanation of warnings and symbols 12
2.2 Product safety information 12
3 Design and Function 14
3.1 Overview 14
3.1.1 Balance 14
3.1.2 Terminal 16
3.2 User interface 18
3.2.1 Display 18
3.2.2 Input dialog boxes 19
3.2.2.1 Text and number entry 19
3.2.3 Firmware 20
3.2.3.1 User profiles 20
3.2.3.2 User-specific settings 21
3.2.3.3 Applications 21
3.2.3.4 Application-specific settings 22
3.2.3.5 System settings 22
3.2.4 Security system 23
4 Installation and Putting into Operation 24
4.1 Unpacking 24
4.2 Scope of delivery 25
4.3 Location 26
4.4 Assembling the balance 26
4.5 Draft shield intermediate shelf 28
4.6 Connecting the balance 29
4.7 Setting up the balance 30
4.7.1 Weighing for the first time 30
4.7.1.1 Switching on the balance 30
4.7.1.2 Leveling the balance 30
4.7.1.3 Performing a simple weighing 31
4.7.2 Operating the glass draft shield 31
4.7.3 Setting the reading angle and positioning the terminal 32
4.7.3.1 Changing the reading angle 32
4.7.3.2 Separating the terminal 33
4.7.4 Below-the-balance weighing 33
4.7.5 Mounting the ErgoClips 34
4.7.6 Mounting the single-use aluminum weighing pan 35
4.7.7 Fitting the SmartGrid cover 35
4.8 Transporting the balance 36
4.8.1 Switching off the balance 36
4.8.2 Transport over short distances 36
4.8.3 Transport over long distances 36
5 System Settings 40
5.1 System settings overview 40
Table of Contents 3
5.2 Adjustment/Test 42
5.2.1 Introduction for adjustment and tests 42
5.2.2 Settings for adjustments and tests 43
5.2.2.1 Test/Adjustment - weight settings 44
5.2.3 Test sequences 45
5.2.3.1 Configuration of test sequence parameters 46
5.2.3.1.1 Name 46
5.2.3.1.2 Preparations 46
5.2.3.1.3 Method 47
5.2.3.1.4 Error action 59
5.2.3.1.5 Error instructions 61
5.2.3.1.6 Release code 61
5.2.3.1.7 Entry in GWP history 61
5.2.4 Tasks 62
5.2.4.1 Task status 62
5.2.4.2 Assigning a test sequence to a task. 63
5.2.4.3 Starting method 63
5.2.4.4 Defined days 65
5.2.4.5 Defined users 66
5.2.5 ProFACT/int. Adjustment 66
5.2.5.1 Definition of parameters for ProFACT 66
5.2.5.2 Extended options 67
5.2.6 Automatic adjustment with an external test weight 68
5.2.6.1 Definition of parameters for automatic adjustment 68
5.2.7 Testing the adjustment with an external test weight 69
5.2.7.1 Definition of parameters for testing the adjustment 69
5.2.8 Test history 70
5.2.9 Protocol – Definition of adjustment and test reports 71
5.3 Balance information 72
5.4 Standby 72
5.5 Date/Time 73
5.6 Peripherals 73
5.7 Option 75
5.8 Administrator 76
5.8.1 Configuration of the security system 76
5.8.1.1 Changing the administrator ID and password 77
5.8.1.2 Performing a master reset 78
5.8.1.3 Definition of user access rights 78
5.8.1.4 Recording safety-relevant operations 79
5.8.1.5 Reminder function for changing a password 80
5.8.1.6 Definition of the number of users 80
5.9 Level sensor 81
6 User-specific Settings 82
6.1 Overview of user-specific settings 82
6.2 Weighing parameters 83
6.2.1 Weighing mode 84
6.2.2 Ambient conditions 84
6.2.3 Measured value release 85
4 Table of Contents
6.2.4 AutoZero 85
6.3 User 85
6.3.1 User name 86
6.3.2 Language 86
6.3.3 User ID and password 87
6.4 Doors 87
6.5 Terminal 88
6.5.1 Brightness 89
6.5.2 Color selection 89
6.5.3 Beep 90
6.5.4 Touch function 90
6.5.5 Touch adjustment 90
6.5.6 Optical key feedback 90
6.5.7 Speedread 91
6.5.8 Status indicator 91
6.6 User factory settings 91
7 Weighing Application 93
7.1 Weighing application settings 93
7.1.1 Selecting function keys 95
7.1.1.1 Function key overview 95
7.1.2 Selecting SmartTrac 97
7.1.3 Selecting information fields 97
7.1.4 Specifications for automatic protocol printout 98
7.1.5 Selecting weighing units 99
7.1.6 Defining free weighing units 99
7.1.7 Protocol definition 100
7.1.8 Specifications for manual protocol printout 104
7.1.9 Output data formatting (transfer key) 104
7.1.9.1 Output format 105
7.1.9.2 Data output to the printer 106
7.1.10 Definition of identifications and protocol headers 107
7.1.11 Instructions for processing barcode data 108
7.1.12 Instructions for processing RFID data 109
7.1.13 MinWeigh function settings 109
7.1.14 Tare memory definition and activation 110
7.1.15 Automatic taring function settings 111
7.1.16 Settings for SmartSens and ErgoSens 112
7.1.17 Settings for the optional anti-static kit (ionizer) 113
7.1.18 Settings for electrostatic detection 113
7.2 Working with the weighing application 114
7.2.1 Changing the weighing result resolution 114
7.2.2 Taring options 115
7.2.3 Working with the lot counter 116
7.2.4 Working with identifications 116
7.2.5 Weighing-in to a nominal weight 117
7.2.6 Working with the "MinWeigh" function 118
7.3 Balance adjustment and testing 119
7.3.1 Adjustment 120
7.3.1.1 Adjustment with internal weight/ProFACT 120
Table of Contents 5
7.3.1.2 Adjustment with external test weight 120
7.3.2 Testing 121
7.3.2.1 Testing the adjustment with internal weight 121
7.3.2.2 Testing the adjustment with external test weight 122
7.3.3 Protocols 122
7.3.3.1 Adjustment and test records (sample records) 123
7.4 Working with the test sequence function 124
7.4.1 Starting a task 124
7.4.1.1 EC Method for eccentric load test 125
7.4.1.2 RP1 Method for repeatability test 126
7.4.1.3 RPT1 Method for repeatability test with tare weight 126
7.4.1.4 SE1 Method for sensitivity test with one test weight 127
7.4.1.5 SE2 Method for sensitivity test with two test weights 127
7.4.1.6 SERVICE method reminder/pre-warning time 127
7.4.1.7 SET1 Method for sensitivity test with tare weight and one test weight 127
7.4.1.8 SET2 Method for sensitivity test with tare weight and two test weights 128
8 Statistics Application 129
8.1 Settings for the Statistics application 129
8.1.1 Specific function keys for using statistics 130
8.1.2 Specific data fields for statistics 130
8.1.3 Specifications for automatic weight entry 131
8.1.4 Specific protocol information for statistics 132
8.1.5 Enable additive mode 134
8.1.6 Define plausibility limits 134
8.1.7 Settings for the LV11 tablet feeder 135
8.2 Working with the Statistics application 135
8.2.1 Capturing statistics from a weighing series 136
8.2.2 Weighing out to a nominal value 138
8.2.3 Example protocol with statistical values 139
8.2.4 Formulas used for the calculation of statistical values 140
9 Formulation Application 142
9.1 Formulation application settings 142
9.1.1 Activation or deactivation of automatic zeroing 143
9.1.2 Specific formulation function keys 143
9.1.3 Specific formulation information fields 144
9.1.4 Specific formulation protocol information 145
9.1.5 Specific formulation identifications 147
9.1.6 Specific SmartSens and ErgoSens formulation settings 148
9.2 Definition of components 149
9.3 Definition and activation of formulations 149
9.3.1 Formulation with fixed components (absolute nominal weights) 150
9.3.2 Formulation with % components (relative nominal weights) 152
9.4 Working with the formulation application 155
9.4.1 Initial settings 155
9.4.2 Free formulation (formulation without using the formulation database) 156
9.4.3 Automatic formulation processing with "fixed components" (absolute nom 157
inal weights)
6 Table of Contents
9.4.4 Automatic formulation processing with "% components" (relative nominal 159
weights)
9.4.5 Sample protocol of a formulation 160
9.5 Information on changing existing components and formulations 160
10 Piece Counting Application 162
10.1 Piece counting application settings 162
10.1.1 Defining the fixed reference unit quantity 163
10.1.2 Specific function keys for piece counting 163
10.1.3 Specific data fields for piece counting 164
10.1.4 Specifications for automatic weight entry 165
10.1.5 Additional unit for piece counting 165
10.1.6 Specific protocol data for piece counting 166
10.1.7 Specific SmartSens and ErgoSens settings for piece counting 168
10.2 Working with the Piece Counting application 169
10.2.1 Simple piece counting 169
10.2.2 Totalizing and acquiring statistics from piece counts 170
10.2.3 Counting to a nominal value 172
10.2.4 Reference optimization 173
10.2.5 Example protocol of a piece count with statistical values 174
11 Percent Weighing Application 176
11.1 Settings for percent weighing application 176
11.1.1 Specific function key for percent weighing 177
11.1.2 Specific information fields for percent weighing 177
11.1.3 Additional unit for percent weighing 178
11.1.4 Specific protocol information for percent weighing 178
11.1.5 Specific SmartSens and ErgoSens settings for percent weighing 180
11.2 Working with the percent weighing application 181
11.2.1 Simple percent weighing 181
11.2.2 Percent weighing to a nominal weight 182
11.2.3 Sample protocol of a percent weighing 182
12 Density Application 184
12.1 Density application settings 184
12.1.1 Selecting the density determination method 185
12.1.2 Selecting an auxiliary liquid 185
12.1.3 Activation or deactivation of statistics 185
12.1.4 Specifications for calculation and result display 186
12.1.5 Specific function keys for density determination 186
12.1.6 Specific information fields for density determination 187
12.1.7 Specific protocol information for density determination 188
12.1.8 Specific SmartSens and ErgoSens settings for density determination 190
12.2 Working with the density application 191
12.2.1 Determination of the density of non-porous solids 191
12.2.2 Determination of the density of liquids using a sinker 193
12.2.3 Determination of the density of pasty substances using a gamma sphere 194
12.2.4 Determination of the density of liquids using a pycnometer 195
12.2.5 Determination of the density of porous solids 196
12.2.6 Example protocol of a density determination 198
12.3 Using density statistics 198
Table of Contents 7
12.4 Formulae used to calculate density 200
12.4.1 Formulae for determining the density of solids 200
12.4.2 Formulae for determining the density of liquids and pasty substances 201
12.5 Density table for distilled water 201
12.6 Density table for ethanol 202
13 Differential Weighing Application 203
13.1 Settings for differential weighing application 203
13.1.1 Specific function keys for differential weighing 204
13.1.2 Specific information fields for differential weighing 205
13.1.3 Specific protocol information for differential weighing 205
13.1.4 Behavior of the Print key 208
13.1.5 Specific setting for processing barcode data 208
13.2 Defining, editing, deleting and selecting series 209
13.2.1 Defining a new series 209
13.2.2 Editing an existing series 210
13.2.3 Deleting a series 210
13.2.4 Selecting a series for differential weighing 211
13.3 Working with the differential weighing application 211
13.3.1 The various differential weighing methods 211
13.3.2 Initial settings 213
13.3.3 Differential weighing with automatic procedure 214
13.3.4 Differential weighing with manual sequence 216
13.3.5 Example of a differential weighing protocol 219
13.3.6 Further options 219
13.4 Formulae used for the calculation of differential weighing results 221
14 Pipette Check Application 222
14.1 Pipette check application settings 223
14.1.1 Specific Quick-Check option settings 223
14.1.2 Specific training option settings 223
14.1.3 Specific RFID recognition beep settings 224
14.1.4 Specific pipette check application function keys 224
14.1.5 Specific Quick-Check protocol information 224
14.1.6 Specific training protocol information 226
14.2 Working with the pipette check application 226
14.2.1 Pipette check 227
14.2.2 Carrying out a Quick-Check 227
14.2.3 Training 228
14.2.4 Pipette configuration 229
14.2.4.1 Scanning a new pipette with RFID tag 229
14.2.4.2 Editing pipette data 230
14.2.5 Example protocol of a Quick-Check 230
14.3 Calculations for Quick-Check 231
15 Titration Application 232
15.1 Titration application settings 232
15.1.1 Specific RFID option settings 232
15.1.2 Specific identifications for titration 233
15.1.3 Specific titration function keys 234
8 Table of Contents
15.1.4 Specific protocol information for titration 235
15.2 Working with the titration application 236
16 Maintenance 238
16.1 Cleaning 238
16.2 Disposal 238
16.3 Firmware (Software) Updates 239
16.3.1 How it Works 239
16.3.2 Update Procedure 239
17 Troubleshooting 240
17.1 Error messages 240
17.2 Status messages/Status icons 241
17.3 What to do if....? 242
18 Technical Data 243
18.1 General data 243
18.2 Explanatory notes for the METTLER TOLEDO AC adapter 243
18.3 Model-specific data 244
18.4 Dimensions 247
18.5 Interfaces 248
18.5.1 Specifications of RS232C 248
18.5.2 Specifications of "Aux" connection 248
19 Accessories and Spare Parts 249
19.1 Accessories 249
19.2 Spare parts 261
20 Appendix 263
20.1 MT-SICS interface commands and functions 263
20.2 Procedure for certified balances 263
20.3 Recommended printer settings 264
Glossary 266
Index 269
Table of Contents 9
1 Introduction
Thank you for choosing a METTLER TOLEDO balance.
This balance offers numerous weighing and adjustment options with exceptional operating convenience.
METTLER TOLEDO is a leading manufacturer of balances for laboratory and production use as well as analyti
cal measuring instruments. A globally present customer service network with highly trained personnel is always
available to assist with the selection of accessories or provide advice on the optimal use of the balance.
Various models offering different performance features are available. Models offer different weighing ranges and
resolutions. Special reference is made to these features in these instructions if important for operation.
All XPE line models offer the following features:
● StaticDetect for detection of electrostatic charges
● Glass draft shield with motorized opening for precise weighing even in unstable environments.
● Fully automatic adjustment "ProFACT" using internal weights.
● Built-in level sensor, illuminated level indicator and Leveling Assistant for fast and easy leveling.
● Built-in applications for normal weighing, statistics, formulation, piece numbers, percent weighing, density
determination, differential weighing, pipette test and titration.
● Integral RS232C interface.
● Slot for second interface (optional).
● Touch-sensitive graphic terminal ("Touch screen") with color display and status indicator.
● Two programmable sensors for hands-off operation ("SmartSens") to speed up frequently recurring tasks.
The balance conforms to current standards and directives. It supports requirements, work techniques and proto
cols as specified by all international quality assurance systems, e.g. GLP (Good Laboratory Practice), GMP
(Good Manufacturing Practice). The balance has a CE Declaration of Conformity and METTLER TOLEDO, as the
manufacturer, is certified to ISO 9001 and ISO 14001. This provides the assurance that your capital investment
is protected in the long term by high product quality and a comprehensive service package (repairs, mainte
nance, servicing, adjustment service).
Finding more information
u www.mt.com/excellence
Software version
These operating instructions refer to the originally installed firmware (software) version V 1.00.
1.1 The following conventions apply to these operating instructions

Key and button designations are shown in graphic or text form in square brackets (e.g. [ ] or
[Define].
These symbols indicate an instruction:

Requirements
1 Steps
2…
Results
Introduction 11
2 Safety Information
2.1 Explanation of warnings and symbols
Safety notes are indicated by signal words and warning symbols and contain warnings and information about
safety issues. Ignoring safety notes can lead to personal injury, damage to the instrument, malfunctions and
erroneous results.
Signal words
WARNING for a hazardous situation with medium risk, possibly resulting in severe
injuries or death if not avoided.
CAUTION for a hazardous situation with low risk, resulting in damage to the device or
the property or in loss of data or minor or medium injuries if not avoided.
Attention (no symbol)

for important information about the product.
Note (no symbol)

for useful information about the product.
Warning symbols
General hazard Electrical shock
Mandatory signs
Gloves must be worn
2.2 Product safety information

Intended use
Your balance is used for weighing. Use the balance exclusively for this purpose. Any other type of use and
operation beyond the limits of technical specifications without written consent from Mettler-Toledo AG, is con
sidered as not intended.
It is not permitted to use the instrument in explosive atmosphere of gases, steam, fog, dust
and flammable dust (hazardous environments).
General safety information

This balance complies with current industry standards and the recognized safety regulations; however, it can
constitute a hazard in use. Do not open the balance housing: The balance contains no user-serviceable parts.
In the event of problems, please contact a METTLER TOLEDO representative.
Always operate and use your instrument only in accordance with the instructions contained in this manual. The
instructions for setting up your new instrument must be strictly observed.
If the instrument is not used according to these Operating Instructions, protection of the instrument may
be impaired and METTLER TOLEDO assumes no liability.
12 Introduction
Staff safety
These operating instructions must be read and understood before using the balance. These operating instruc
tions must be retained for future reference.
The balance must not be altered or modified in any way. Only use METTLER TOLEDO original spare parts and
accessories.
Safety notes
WARNING

Risk of electric shock

Use only the original universal AC adapter delivered with your balance, and check that the
voltage printed on it is the same as your local power supply voltage. Only plug the adapter
into a socket which is grounded.
CAUTION

Damage to the balance

a) Only use indoors in dry locations.
b) Do not use pointed objects to operate the keyboard!
The balance is of a very sturdy design, but is still a precision instrument. It must be han
dled with care.
c) Do not open the balance:
The balance contains no user-serviceable parts. In the event of problems, please contact
a METTLER TOLEDO representative.
d) Only use METTLER TOLEDO original accessories and peripheral devices for the balance.
These are specifically designed for the balance.
Safety Information 13
3 Design and Function
This section describes the balance, operating and indicating elements of the terminal and the operating concept
of the balance firmware.
3.1 Overview
3.1.1 Balance
10 11 6
ww
9 w.m
t.com
METTLER TOLEDO
8 XPE2
04
12
13
6
5
14
4
3 F
Sta
ticDete
ct
2
1
F
3
15
Front view
1 Terminal 2 Display
3 Operating keys 4 SmartSens sensors
5 StaticDetect drip tray for detection of electro 6 Handle/coupling element for operation of the
static charges draft shield doors
7 StaticDetect light 8 Type designation
9 Glass draft shield 10 Handle for operation of the top draft shield
door
11 Guide for top draft shield door and transport 12 Removable clips for feeding cables or hoses
handle
13 Level indicator/Level sensor 14 SmartGrid weighing pan
15 Status indicator
14 Safety Information
2 3
1
4
5
8 7
Rear
1 Aux 1 (connection for "ErgoSens", hand or foot 2 Aux 2 (connection for "ErgoSens", hand or foot
switch) switch)
3 RS232C serial interface 4 Slot for second interface (optional)
5 Socket for AC adapter 6 Fastening point for anti-theft device
7 Foot screw 8 Cooling element (model dependent)
Design and Function 15

3.1.2 Terminal
Key assignments and terminal connection.
1 1
2 2
3 7
4 8
5 9
6 6
10 11 12 13
Front view
Designation Explanation
1 SmartSens Two hands-free sensors.
Both of these hands-free sensors can be assigned a specific
function (e.g. zeroing, printing or display resolution adjust
ment).
See settings for SmartSens and ErgoSens in the respective
applications.
A specific function can be activated by moving the hand over
the respective sensor (maximum distance about 5 cm). The
sensor beeps to confirm that it has recognized the command.
2 Status bar The green icons in the status bar indicate the functions assigned
to the SmartSens left or SmartSens right. The F symbol repre
sents a function key. SmartSens is deactivated when no green
symbol is illuminated.
The yellow LED at the bottom of the status bar lights up briefly
when a key is selected or a menu function is initiated.
3 Home This key is used to return to the user profile Home from any
menu level in any application.
4 User profile This key is used to display a specific user profile. Different set
tings can be saved in a user profile. This allows the balance to
be adjusted to a specific user or weighing task.
5 Settings for user pro For defining basic settings for each user profile. These settings
files apply to all user applications.

6 Open/Close For opening and closing the glass draft shield doors. For conve
nient right and left-handed operation, one of these keys is pro
vided on both sides of the terminal.
7 Select application This key is used to select a required application.
8 Configuration For displaying menus for the configuration of a current applica

tion. The application can be adjusted to a specific task via
numerous settings.
9 Print This key is used to transfer data via the interface, e.g. to a print
er. Other devices, e.g. a PC can also be connected. The data to
be transferred can be freely defined.
10 On/Off For switching the balance on and off (standby mode).
Note
It is recommended not to disconnect the balance from the power
supply unless it is not going to be used for an extended period.
11 Tare This key is used to tare the balance manually (only necessary
for normal weighings). When the balance has been tared, the
Net symbol is displayed to indicate that all displayed weights
are net.
Note
A negative weight is not permitted. An error message is generat
ed.
When the stability detector icon extinguishes (small ring on the
left of the weight display), a stable weight is indicated.
The procedure for taring the balance is not the same as for zero
ing.
12 Zeroing This key is used for setting a new zero point manually (only
required if the balance is used for normal weighings). After zero
ing "Zeroing", all weights (also the tare weight) apply to this
new zero point and the following applies: tare weight = 0, net
weight (= gross weight) = 0.
13 Status indicator Indicates the current balance status. The status indicator shows
that the balance is ready to use.
Green = balance is ready to use.
Flashing green = balance is busy. Example: Internal adjustment
in progress.
Yellow = task pending, balance can still be used. Example:
Automatic internal adjustment pending.
Red = balance cannot/must not be used. Example: Balance is
not correctly leveled.

2 1 2
Rear
1 System connection (terminal cable) 2 Foot screw
3.2 User interface
3.2.1 Display
The illuminated, color display of the terminal is a touch screen, i.e. a touch-sensitive screen. It can be used for
displaying data, entering settings and selecting functions by tapping the screen.
Note
Depending on country-specific requirements, non-calibrated decimal places are highlighted on calibrated bal
ances.
CAUTION

Do not touch the touch screen with pointed or sharp objects!

This may damage the touch screen.
1 2 3
4
5
6
9 7
1 Application name Select application.
The application menu can be selected by tapping this zone. The application can
be selected here. This menu can also be displayed by pressing [ ].
Current user profile Displays the current user profile.
2 Date The date can be changed by tapping this zone.
3 Time The time can be changed by tapping this zone.

4 Status icons These status icons indicate special balance statuses (e.g. service due, adjust
ment required, battery replacement).
A separate selection window is displayed when the icons are tapped. When the
icons are tapped, their functions are explained.
5 Weight value Tapping the weight displays a window showing the result in a large format. This
is useful for reading a weight from a certain distance.
6 Weighing unit The required weighing unit can be changed by tapping the weighing unit, e.g.
from mg to g.
7 SmartTrac SmartTrac is a graphic weighing-in aid, which shows at a glance an already
used and still available weighing range. Various display modes can be selected
for SmartTrac or deactivated by tapping this area.
8 Function keys This area is reserved for Function Keys enabling direct access to frequently
required functions and application settings. If more than 5 function keys are acti
vated, these can be selected with the arrow keys.
9 Information fields This area is used for displaying additional information (information fields) relat
ing to an active application. Tapping the information field enables Information
fields and Function Keys to be displayed directly via menu selection. The level
ing assistant can also be started.
Screen saver
If the balance is not used for 15 minutes, the display is automatically dimmed and the pixels are inverted about
every 15 seconds. When the balance is used again (e.g. load weight, press key), the display returns to a nor
mal state.
3.2.2 Input dialog boxes

The keyboard dialog box is used to enter characters such as letters, numbers and special characters.
3.2.2.1 Text and number entry
1
2
1 Data field Displays (entered) alphanumeric and numeric characters.
2 Keyboard Data input area
3 Selection Selects various keyboards.
1 Enter the designation.
2 Confirm with [OK].

Function
Delete last character
Tap once to place the cursor at
the end of the data field.
3.2.3 Firmware
The firmware controls all balance functions. It enables the balance to be adjusted to a specific working environ
ment.
The firmware is divided as follows:
● User profiles
● User-specific settings
● Applications
● Application-specific settings
● System settings
Note
A displayed menu can be left at any time by repressing the same key as used for its selection.
3.2.3.1 User profiles
User profiles are used to adjust the balance to suit specific applications and personal work techniques or spe
cific weighing tasks. A user profile is a collection of user defined settings that can be selected at the press of a
button. The last active user profile is automatically loaded when the balance is switched on.
1
2
3
4
1 Title bar The title bar displays elements for user orientation and information.
2 Contents area The contents area is the main work area for menus and applications. The con
tents depend on the specific application or initiated action.
3 Home The Home profile is a starting point that can be returned to at any time by press
ing the [ ] key. It contains factory settings for all users. These settings can be
changed as required. It is recommended not to change the Home profile factory
settings, but make adjustments in further user profiles.
4 User profiles Settings in further user profiles can be changed as required. All settings made in
an active user profile are saved under this profile. This includes both application
and user-specific settings. The system settings are not changed.
– A user profile can be changed by tapping the respective button.

3.2.3.2 User-specific settings
These settings can be used to adjust the balance to suit the tasks and work techniques of individual users. The
settings can be defined separately for each user profile and for the Homeprofile. When a user profile is selected,
the corresponding user-specific settings are automatically loaded.
1
2
3 Action bar The action bar contains action buttons for performing specific actions required in
the active dialog box and are available (e.g. [Exit], [STD], [C], [OK]).
1 Settings can be changed by tapping the respective button.
2 To leave the settings, select [Exit].
3 To change the system settings, tap [System].
Function
Exit Exit settings
System Display system settings
3.2.3.3 Applications
Applications are firmware modules for performing specific weighing tasks. The balance is provided with various
applications on delivery. After switching on the balance, the last active user profile and last used application are
loaded. The applications are available under the [ ] key. Instructions for working with standard applications
are provided in the respective sections.
1
2

– An application can be selected by tapping the corresponding button.
Function
System Display system settings
3.2.3.4 Application-specific settings
These settings can be used to adjust the applications to suit individual user requirements. The available setting
options depend on the selected application. Pressing [ ] opens the multipage menu with settings for a cur
rently active application. Information on the individual setting options is provided in the section relating to the
respective application. Settings can be defined separately for each user profile and for the Home profile. When a
user profile is selected, the corresponding application-specific settings are automatically loaded.
1
2
4
3 5
4 Button Edit/Select settings (e.g. [Define], [On], [Off]). The contents depend on the
application.
5 Arrow The arrow buttons are used to page forward or back.
Function
Page forward
Page back
3.2.3.5 System settings
System settings (e.g. settings for peripheral devices) are independent of the user profiles and applications and
apply to the entire weighing system. System settings can be displayed by pressing [ ] or [ ] and then the
[System] button.

>
System 1
or
> 2
System
2 To leave the settings, tap [Exit].
3.2.4 Security system
The balance has a comprehensive security system with which individual access rights can be defined at
administrator and user level. Settings that may be changed can be defined for each individual user profile.
Access to protected menu areas requires the entry of identification (ID) and a password. On delivery of the bal
ance, only the [Administrator] settings in the system settings are protected.
When an ID and password protected menu area is selected, an alphanumeric keyboard is initially displayed for
entry of the ID.
CAUTION

Remember IDs and passwords!

Protected menu areas cannot be accessed without ID or password.
– Note IDs and passwords and keep them in a safe place.
1 Enter your ID.

- Case sensitive, tap the [a...z] and [A...Z] button to switch between upper and lower case.
- To enter numbers, tap the [0...9] button.
- Incorrect entries can be deleted character by character with the arrow key .
Note
Entry can be interrupted at any time by tapping [C].
2 After entering the full ID, tap [OK].
A further dialog box is displayed for entering the password.
3 Enter the password (for security reasons, this is displayed with asterisks instead of plain text) and confirm
with [OK].
If the ID and password are correct, the selected menu area is displayed or the required action initiated. If
these are incorrect, an error message is displayed with a request to enter them again.

4 Installation and Putting into Operation
4.1 Unpacking
Open the balance packaging. Check the balance for transport damage. Immediately inform a METTLER TOLEDO
representative in the event of complaints or missing accessories.
Note
Retain all parts of the packaging. This packaging offers the best possible protection for transporting the bal
ance.
– Use the lifting strap to lift the balance out of the packaging box.
Overview
1 Lifting strap
2 Top packaging 1
3 Operating instructions and other important documents
2
4 Balance 3
5 Set with draft-shield doors and terminal support 4
6 Set with AC adapter, power supply cable, drip tray, Smart 5
Grid, SmartGrid cover, SmartPrep single-use funnel and 7 6
ErgoClip "Basket" (basket for small weighing objects).
7 Terminal 8
Note
The terminal is connected to the balance with a cable!
8 Bottom packaging
1 Remove the lifting strap (1).

2 Remove the top packaging (2).
1 Remove the operating instructions (3).

2 Remove the set with AC adapter (6).
3 Remove the set with draft shield doors (5).

1 Carefully remove the terminal from the bottom packaging.
2 Remove the protective cover.
Note
Since the terminal is connected to the balance with a cable, only
withdraw the balance slightly from the packaging in order to
remove the protective cover.
1 Place the terminal at the front of the balance.

2 Hold the balance by the guide or handle. Hold the terminal
firmly with the other hand. Pull out both components together
from the bottom packaging.
1 Place the balance with the terminal at the site of use.

2 Remove the cover from the balance.
3 Remove the transport protection (9) of the weighing pan sup
port.
4.2 Scope of delivery
Check the delivery for completeness. The following accessories are part of the standard equipment of the bal
ance:
● Balance with terminal
• RS232C interface
• Slot for second interface (optional)
• Feedthroughs for below-the-balance weighing and for antitheft device
● Set with draft-shield doors and terminal support

● SmartGrid
● SmartGrid cover, chromium-nickel steel
● SmartPrep single-use funnel (2 pieces)
● Drip tray
● AC adapter with country-specific power cable
● Protective cover for the terminal
Installation and Putting into Operation 25

● Cleaning brush
● ErgoClip "Basket" (basket for small weighing objects)
● Production certificate
● CE declaration of conformity
● Operating instructions or Quick Start Guide; printed or on CD-ROM, depending on country of use
4.3 Location
An optimal location will ensure accurate and reliable operation of the balance. The surface must be able to
safely take the weight of the balance when fully loaded. The following local conditions must be observed:
Note
If the balance is not horizontal at the outset, it must be leveled during commissioning.
● The balance must only be used indoors and up to a maxi
mum altitude of 4,000 m above sea level.
● Before switching on the balance, wait until all parts are at
room temperature (+5 to 40°C).
The humidity must be between 10% and 80% non-condens
ing.
● The power plug must be accessible at all times.
● Firm, horizontal and vibration-free location.
● Avoid direct sunlight.
● No excessive temperature fluctuations.
● No strong drafts.
Further information can by found in Weighing the Right Way.
4.4 Assembling the balance

1 Remove the transport protection (1).
2 Insert the StaticDetect drip tray (2). 1
Insert the tray from the front above the bottom plate up to the
partition.
1 Insert the SmartGrid from the front.

2 Check that the SmartGrid (1) (2) is correctly hooked in on
both sides. 1

1 Insert the top draft shield door (1) at an angle (slightly below
30 degrees) into the rear guide. 1
2 Carefully fold the draft shield door (2) downwards, see fig
ure.
2
The handles (A) must be folded outwards to mount the side

draft shield doors.
1 Mount the draft shield side doors according to the following
instructions, see figure below.
2 Mount the side doors at an angle of about 30° in the 2 open
ings, see following figure.
3 Check that the side doors are correctly mounted as described.
4 Mount the side door so that it clicks in place in the balance.
The side door will move easily when correctly mounted.
5 Fold the handle of the side draft shield door inwards.
6 Mount the second draft shield side door. The procedure is
identical.
7 Move the side doors fully back.
2
4
3 A

1 Fit the front draft shield glass (2).
Insert the glass at an angle into the bottom of the balance at
the front until the two hooks of the front draft shield glass rest
on the rollers (1).
2 Move the front draft shield glass upwards until it engages.
1 Insert the terminal support.

2 Place the cable in the guide of the terminal support.
3 Insert the terminal support into the opening in the front draft
shield glass.
The terminal support must engage with a click.
1 Mount the terminal.

2 Place the terminal in the center of the support.
3 Push the terminal against the balance until it folds down eas
ily at the front of the terminal support.
4 Insert the cable into the balance.
Attention
The balance and terminal are not connected by the terminal support! Always hold the balance and terminal
firmly during transport.
Note
The terminal can also be placed in the area of the balance without the terminal support if the cable is of suffi
cient length.
4.5 Draft shield intermediate shelf

The weighing chamber volume can be reduced with the optional intermediate shelf. This enables the balance to
indicate weights more quickly. It is also possible to acclimatize the material on the intermediate shelf.
Inserting the intermediate shelf
1 Open all draft shield doors.
1
2 Lift the top draft shield door (1) at the front and remove from
the guide.
3 Place the top draft shield door on a clean surface.
ww
w.m
t.com
XPE
20
4

1 Guide the intermediate shelf 2 2
(2) from above into the
guides of the middle guide
rail. ww
w.m
t.com
2 Position the intermediate XPE2

04
shelf at the required height

(3).
3 Mount the top draft shield
ww
door (1). See Assembling w.m

t.co
m
the balance (page 26). 3

XPE
20
4
4.6 Connecting the balance

WARNING


a) To connect the balance, only use the supplied three-core power cord with equipment
grounding conductor.
b) Only connect the balance to a three-pin power socket with earthing contact.
c) Only standardized extension cable with equipment grounding conductor must be used for
operation of the balance.
d) Intentional disconnection of the equipment grounding conductor is forbidden.
The balance is supplied with an AC adapter and country-specific power cord. The AC adapter is suitable for use
with the following voltage range:
100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
Attention
● Check whether your local power supply falls within this range. If this is not the case, under no circum
stances connect the AC adapter to the power supply, but contact a METTLER TOLEDO representative.
● The power plug must be accessible at all times.
● Prior to use, check the power cord for damage.
● Route the cable in such a way that it cannot be damaged or cause a hindrance when working.
● Ensure that no liquid comes into contact with the AC adapter.

Balance and terminal are at the final location.
1 Connect the AC adapter (1) to the connection socket (2) at
the rear of the balance.
2 Connect the AC adapter (1) to the power supply. 2
The balance performs a self-test after connection to the power

supply and is then ready to use.
4.7 Setting up the balance
4.7.1 Weighing for the first time

After commissioning the new balance, the first weighing can be carried out. This will also familiarize you with
the operation of the balance.
If the balance is not aligned exactly horizontal, a warning text is generated after switching on the balance with
the request to level the balance.
4.7.1.1 Switching on the balance

Startup
Balance is connected to the power supply.
Terminal and balance are interconnected.
– Press [ ].
Display appears.
Balance is ready to use.
4.7.1.2 Leveling the balance

The balance has a built-in level sensor which permanently monitors correct horizontal alignment.
If the level sensor detects incorrect leveling, the status indicator at
the terminal shows red. A warning text is displayed and an audi
ble warning generated. A status icon also appears in the top right
corner of the display.

1 To start the leveling assistant, tap [LevelGuide] in the warn
ing message.
Window with level indicator is displayed in real-time.
2 Observe the level indicator on the screen.
The air bubble in the level indicator shows red with incor
rect alignment.
The leveling assistant indicates with red arrows the direc
tion in which the two foot screws at the rear of the balance
must be turned.
3 Turn the foot screw until the air bubble is located in the inner
circle of the level indicator.
The air bubble in the level indicator shows green with cor
rect alignment.
The status indicator at the terminal shows green.
4 Tap [OK].
A message recommending adjustment of the balance is
displayed.
5 Tap [Adjust.int] to adjust the balance.
4.7.1.3 Performing a simple weighing

To perform a simple weighing, only the keys in the lower part of the terminal are required. The balance has sep
arate keys for zeroing [ ] and taring [ ].
Zeroing
– Press [ ].
Zeroing
After zeroing, all weights (also the tare weight) apply to this new zero point and the following apply: tare weight
= 0, net weight (= gross weight) = 0.
Taring
Note
A negative weight is not permitted. An error message is generated. When the stability detector icon extinguishes
(small ring left of the weight display), the indication is stable. The weight is displayed.
If a weighing container is used, the balance must first be set to zero.
1 Place the container on the balance.
2 Press [ ].
The balance is tared.
The weight of the container is set as the new tare weight and the previous tare (if available) is overwritten.
The Net display signals that all indicated weights are net weights.
Congratulations!
The first weighing is now complete. The following sections contain further information about the extensive func
tions and applications of this balance.
4.7.2 Operating the glass draft shield

The draft shield of the balance can be adjusted to the ambient conditions, weighing method and material to be
weighed.

The glass draft shield doors can be opened and closed by pressing [ ], with the "SmartSens" sensors or
manually .
Try different combinations by moving the 3 handles upwards/inwards and downwards/outwards. We recom
mend aligning the glass draft shield so that only those parts are opened that are required for loading. The bal
ance then operates faster due to less disturbing air flows than with a fully open glass draft shield.
Note
It is recommended to make connections when the draft shield is closed.
Motorized operation
The automatic door function opens and closes the doors of the glass draft shield automatically when required.
Example
● Doors open automatically for loading the tare weight when [ ] is pressed.
● When a request is made to load the adjustment weight while adjusting the balance, the doors open auto
matically. The doors close automatically when the weight is loaded.
● The glass draft shield closes automatically for all weighings to achieve a stable weight indication.
● For different operations (e.g. piece counting), the doors open and close automatically as required by the
application.
Handles are locked.
1 Move the handles for the
side doors inwards.
2 Move the handle for the top
door into the horizontal
position.
The door is automatically
opened when required.
Manual door operation

The doors must be opened or closed manually. With the [ ] keys, via SmartSens or manually.
Handles are unlocked.
1 Move the handles for the side doors outwards.
2 Move the handle for the top door into the vertical position.
3 Press [ ].
or
Move the hand over the SmartSens sensor.
The door is opened.
4.7.3 Setting the reading angle and positioning the terminal
4.7.3.1 Changing the reading angle

To change the reading angle, fold out both tilting feet.

4.7.3.2 Separating the terminal
The terminal is connected to the balance with a cable. For ease of use, the terminal can be separated from the
balance and positioned in a different location.
Note
The cable can also be led out from the rear of the balance. If this is more convenient, contact a METTLER
TOLEDO representative who will be happy to modify the balance.
1 Switch off the balance with [ ].
2 Carefully lift the terminal off the terminal support.
The terminal support can be left on the balance or removed. ww
w.mt
.co
m
METTLER TOLEDO
3 Carefully remove the cable from the balance if this is possi
XPE2
04
ble.
4 Position the balance in the required location.
5 Switch on the balance with [ ].
Sta
ticD
etec
t
4.7.4 Below-the-balance weighing
The balance is provided with a hanger for below-the-balance weighing.

2 Disconnect the AC adapter cable at the rear of the balance.
3 Disconnect any interface cables.
4 Push all glass draft shield doors back.
5 Lift the terminal off the terminal support.
6 Disconnect the connecting cable.
7 Place the terminal at the side of the balance.
8 Move the balance over the edge of the table until the opening
is visible from below, see diagram on the left.
9 Slacken the screw until the cover plate can be turned to the
side and the hanger for weighing below the balance is easily
accessible.
10 Fix the cover plate in the new position with the screw, see
diagram on the right.
11 Move the balance back to its original position.
12 Connect the terminal cable.
13 Place the terminal in the terminal support.
14 Move all glass draft shield doors to the front.
15 Fix any interface cables.
16 Plug the AC adapter into the power supply socket at the rear
of the balance.
The balance is now ready for mounting the below-the-bal
ance weighing device.
4.7.5 Mounting the ErgoClips

ErgoClips allow simple weighing directly in tare containers.
The supplied ErgoClip or an optional ErgoClip must be mounted as described below.
Attention
Before mounting an ErgoClip, the balance must be switched off with the [ ] key.
Important note!
If the balance is not switched off before mounting, the ProFACT function will not be activated.
Reason
The mounted ErgoClip causes the dead load tolerance range of the balance to be exceeded. As a result, the bal
ance does not activate ProFACT so as not to interrupt an assumed weighing process.
When the status icon is displayed, this means that: "The balance needs to activate ProFACT", but cannot.

2 Remove the SmartGrid from the balance.
3 Snap the ErgoClip on to the SmartGrid.
4 Place the SmartGrid with mounted ErgoClip on the balance.
An optional "Flask" or "Tube" ErgoClip can be used.
4.7.6 Mounting the single-use aluminum weighing pan

The single-use aluminum weighing pan is only suitable for weighing with specific tare containers.
Note
For standard operation with conventional tare containers, we do not recommend using this weighing pan. Its
use may affect the stabilization time and degree of accuracy. The listed specifications are reached without a
weighing pan.
CAUTION

Hand injuries
Take care when handling the weighing pan, the corners and edges are extremely sharp!
– Gloves must be worn.
To mount the single-use aluminum weighing pan, remove the SmartGrid from the weighing chamber.
2 Place the single-use aluminum weighing pan on the SmartGrid from above.
3 Fold the 4 side flaps under the bars of the SmartGrid.
4 Place the SmartGrid with weighing pan on the balance.
4.7.7 Fitting the SmartGrid cover

Note
For standard operation with conventional tare containers, we do not recommend using this weighing pan. Its
use may affect the stabilization time and degree of accuracy. The listed specifications are reached without a
weighing pan.
Attention
With the SmartGrid cover fitted, the balance does not switch to the "standby" mode.
CAUTION

Hand injuries
Take care when handling the weighing pan, the corners and edges are extremely sharp!
– Gloves must be worn.
To fit the SmartGrid cover, remove the SmartGrid from the weighing chamber.

2 Gently press the SmartGrid cover on to the SmartGrid.
3 Place the SmartGrid with fitted SmartGrid cover on the bal
ance.
4.8 Transporting the balance
4.8.1 Switching off the balance

2 Disconnect the balance from the power supply.
3 Disconnect all interface cables.
4.8.2 Transport over short distances

To move the balance over a short distance to a new location, follow the instructions below.
CAUTION


Never lift the balance by the glass draft shield or the cooling element, as this can cause
damage!
1 Hold the balance by the guide for the top draft shield door
with one hand.
2 Hold the terminal with the other hand. ww
w.m
t.co
m
METTLER TOLEDO
Since the terminal is not permanently connected to the bal XPE
204
ance, both the balance and terminal must always be held

with one hand.
3 Carefully lift the balance and carry it to its new location. See
Location (page 26).
Sta
F ticD
etec
t
4.8.3 Transport over long distances

The complete original packaging must be used for transportation or shipment of the balance over long dis
tances or if it cannot be ensured that the balance will be transported upright.
Remove the following parts

1 Lift the terminal (1) out of the terminal support and place it
next to the support.
2 Remove the terminal support (2) from the balance. 6 ww
w.m
t.co
m
XPE2
04
3 Tilt the draft shield front glass (3) away from the balance.
4
4 Carefully move the draft shield side doors (4+5) towards the
respective handle and remove the side doors from the guide. 3
5 Lift the front of the top draft shield door (6) and remove it
from the guide.
Sta
F ticD
6 If the optional intermediate shelf (9) is installed, lift it at the 2

etec
t
front and remove it upwards.

F
7 Carefully lift the front of the SmartGrid (7) and lift it out of the
1
guide. 9 8 7 5
8 Remove the drip tray (8).
Pack the draft shield, intermediate shelf and terminal support (Items 2-6 and 9)
– Place these parts in the compartments provided in the origi
nal packaging.
Note
It is recommended to place paper between the side draft
shield glass panels.
Pack the AC adapter, power cord and individual components (Item 7+8)
1 Place the AC adapter and power cord in the packaging.
2 Place the drip tray (8) upside down in the packaging.
3 Place the SmartGrid (7) upside down on the drip tray.
4 Place the ErgoClip "Basket" in the packaging.
CAUTION


Follow the instructions below to avoid damaging the balance when placing in the packag
ing.

1 Slide the transport protection along the weighing pan guide.
2 Move the guide of the top draft shield door to the front.
3 Move the handles for the draft shield side doors upwards and
slide the doors to the front.
Note
The protective covers supplied with the balance and terminal can
be used for packing. These are not shown in the diagrams in
order to illustrate how the individual components must be posi
tioned. The use of these protective covers is recommended.
1 Place the terminal on the balance, see diagram.
2 Carefully place the balance in the bottom packaging.
– Remove the terminal and place it in front of the packaging on

the table.
– Place the packaging set with the draft shield glass panels in
the packaging, see diagram.
1 Place the set with the AC adapter in front of the set with draft
shield glass panels.
2 Place the terminal in the packaging as illustrated.

1 Place the top packaging in position.
Ensure that the packaging is correctly positioned.
2 Place the lifting strap around both parts of the packaging, see
diagram.
3 Tighten the strap around the packaging.
Lift the packed balance by the lifting strap and place in the
transport box.

5 System Settings
Navigation: [ ] or [ ] > [System]
This section describes the procedure for adapting the balance to suit specific requirements. The system settings
apply to the entire weighing system and therefore to all user profiles and applications.
A printer is connected and activated as an output device in the peripheral device settings.
– To print out the settings, press [ ].
Note
● The detail of the protocol depends on the point at which printout is activated in the system settings. When
[ ] is pressed in the uppermost level of the system settings, all system settings are recorded. If printing is
started in the [Peripherals] submenu for example, only the settings for the peripheral devices are recorded.
● The Test/Adj. Weights, Test Sequences and Tasks submenus in the [Adjust/Test] menu must be printed
separately.
– The system settings can be displayed by pressing [ ] and subsequently the [System] button.
or
Press [ ] and subsequently the [System] button.
The [System] window is displayed.
Example: Printout
System Autom. ext. Adjust. Test History

Adjust/Test Autom. ext. Adjust. Adj. History
ProFACT On Weekdays Adj. History Selection
ProFACT Monday x Selection
ProFACT Tuesday - Manual adjust. x
Weekdays Wednesday - Temperature x
Monday x Thursday - Time Adjust. x
Tuesday x Friday - Display Datasets Last 50
Wednesday x Saturday - Protocol
Thursday x Sunday - Date/Time x
Friday x Autom. ext. Test Off User x
Saturday x Autom. ext. Test Balance Type x
Sunday x Weekdays SNR x
Time 1 9:00 Monday x SW-Version -
ProFACT Tuesday - Balance ID -
Time Wednesday - Weight ID -
Time 2 Off Thursday - Certificate No.
ProFACT Friday -
Time Saturday -
Time 3 Off Sunday -
ProFACT Time 9:00
Time Time
Temp.Criterion 1 Kelvin
Protocol Trigger On
Autom. ext. Adjust. Off
5.1 System settings overview

The system settings are displayed in the form of symbols. The individual settings can be displayed and
changed by tapping the symbols on the touch screen.
1 Tap, e.g. [Adjust/Test].
The [Adjust/Test] window is displayed.
2 Select the required menu item (e.g. Test Sequences).

3 Tap [Define].
Test Sequences window is displayed.
4 Change the settings and confirm with [OK].
5 To exit the menu item, tap [OK].
6 To exit the system settings, tap [Exit] or press [ ].
Adjust/Test Settings for adjustment and test functions for verification of
adjustments.
Info Display/printing of balance information.
Standby Settings for the standby mode.
Date/Time Entry of date and time and selection of required display formats.
Peripherals Configuration of interface for various peripheral devices.
Option Configuration of the optional interface.
Administrator Configuration of the security system of the balance with alloca

tion of access rights and passwords for weighing functions and
menus.
Levelcontrol Settings for the built-in level sensor.
Menu structure
Main menu Submenu Further information
Adjust/Test Test/Adj. Weights See Settings for adjustments and
tests (page 43)
Test Sequences See Test sequences (page 45)
Tasks See Tasks (page 62)
ProFACT / Int. Adj. See ProFACT/int. Adjustment
(page 66)
Autom. ext. Adjust. See Automatic adjustment with an
external test weight (page 68)
Autom. ext. Test See Testing the adjustment with an
Test History See Test history (page 70)
Protocol See Protocol – Definition of adjust
ment and test reports (page 71)
Info Balance ID See Balance information (page 72)
Info
Standby Standby See Standby (page 72)
Date/Time Date format See Date/Time (page 73)
Date
Time Format
Time
System Settings 41
Peripherals Printer See Peripherals (page 73)
Host
LabX
LabX Controlled Device
Tablet Feeder
Secondary Display
Barcode
RFID
LC I/O
Option DHCP See Option (page 75)
IP-Adress
Subnet Mask
Standard Gateway
Domain Name Server
Hostname
Administrator Protected Area: Enter Administrator See Administrator (page 76)
ID.
Protected Area: Enter Admin. Pass
word.
Administrator ID
Administrator Password
Master Reset
Home Rights
User 1 Rights … User 7 Rights
History
Passw. Change Date
Number of users
Levelcontrol Off See Level sensor (page 81)
Levelcontrol
5.2 Adjustment/Test
5.2.1 Introduction for adjustment and tests

This section applies to the configuration of the balance for carrying out adjustments and tests.
The balance is assembled and installed as stated in the operating instructions.
The balance leveled.
1 Connect the printer to printout settings or reports.
2 Activate the printer as an output device in the peripheral device settings.
Principles for carrying out adjustments and tests
Balances play a decisive role in research, development, quality assurance and production. Weighing errors
cost time and money and non-compliance with legal requirements can be detrimental to health. With the Good
Weighing Practice™ of METTLER TOLEDO, the routine testing of balances is efficient, precise and safe. Our
GWP® Verification Service also offers a unique, personalized document with precise suggestions for the rou
tine testing of balances, taking specific weighing risks into account:
● How the balance should be tested and how often.
● What weights are used.
● What tolerances are appropriate.
42 System Settings
GWP® Test Manager was specially developed, as part of our balance firmware, to simplify routine tests. In
combination with GWP® Verification, efficient balance testing is ensured and specific audit requirements can
be fulfilled more easily.
Further information can be found on our website: www.mt.com/GWPVerification
GWP® Test Manager
GWP® Test Manager is a collection of security functions for the balance. These individually programmable
functions improve measuring accuracy and routine testing of the balance. Some of these functions serve for
routine testing with external test weights. This means that the balance provides active support with test requests
and predefined guided sequences. This ensures that outstanding tests are not forgotten and complex tasks such
as repeatability tests can be carried out accurately by any person in the laboratory.
Additional functions were developed to prevent measuring errors with active user support and internal sensors.
These are, e.g. temperature sensors that can register possible temperature changes in the measuring cell and
initiate internal adjustment. The respective location of the balance can be assessed with the aid of the internal
weight.
A precondition is the definition of criteria to be fulfilled to ensure that the balance displays appropriate mes
sages or performs specific operations. This is possible with GWP® Test Manager. The sequences can be doc
umented via PC software or printer via the interface.
The configuration process
In order to prepare the balance for a routine test and adjustment, a straightforward 3-stage process is required:
1 Register the test weights.
Information relating to all test weights is stored in a balance database.
2 Define the test sequence.
Describes the type of test (method) and the test weight and tolerance with which this must be carried
out.
3 Carry out the test sequence.
The task defines when and how the test sequence must be started and carried out.
Documentation and storage

To ensure the traceability of adjustments and tests, it is important to print the settings and periodically the
results of the test history.
The results are stored in the test history up to maximum 120 entries. When this limit is reached, the oldest
results are overwritten.
Each time the test sequence is changed, the version number is increased and displayed in the right top corner
of the display. It is recommended to print and file each new version in a folder.
A complete list of individual settings can be printed by pressing the [ ] key while the respective menu is open.
5.2.2 Settings for adjustments and tests

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test]
This section describes all menu options and parameters relating to adjustment and testing of the balance.
For carrying out adjustments and tests, see Balance adjustment and testing (page 119).
The arrow buttons can be used to page forward or back to a menu page.
The following parameters can be defined:
Menu item Explanation Further information
Test/Adj. Define the test weights and parameters for adjust See Test/Adjustment - weight settings
Weights ment. Procedures for testing or adjustment. (page 44)
Test Sequences Defines the parameters of a test sequence for testing See Test sequences (page 45)
and behavior of the balance.
System Settings 43
Tasks Defines the task of a test sequence. See Tasks (page 62)
ProFACT / Int. Fully automatic internal balance adjustment. See ProFACT/int. Adjustment
Adj. (page 66)
Autom. ext. Adjustment external adjustment. See Automatic adjustment with an
Adjust. external test weight (page 68)
Autom. ext. Test Adjustment testing. See Testing the adjustment with an
Test History Defines the settings for the test history. See Test history (page 70)
Protocol Defines the settings for the adjustment and test pro See Protocol – Definition of adjust
tocols. ment and test reports (page 71)
5.2.2.1 Test/Adjustment - weight settings

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test/Adj. Weights
This menu can be used to enter the designations or numbers of the certificate supplied with the respective test
weight. This enables each external test weight to be clearly assigned to a specific certificate. Up to 12 external
test weights can be configured. These test weights are used to carry out external tests and adjustments.
1 Tap [Define].
Test/Adj. Weights window is displayed.
2 Select an undefined weight or the name of the weight, the parameters of which are to be updated.
3 Tap [Define].
The defined weights are available for selection again in the test sequences.
Note
When the weight list is displayed, all parameters of the 12 test weights can be printed out with [ ].
Menu structure
Test/Adj. Weight 1 … Name See Parameter table
Test/Adj. Weight12 Weight ID
Class
Certificate No.
Weight Set No.
Actual Value
Next Recalibration
Parameters Explanation Values
Name Defines a name for a test weight (max. 20 characters). Any
Note (Test/Adj. Weights)*
Alternatively to the weight ID and certificate number (e.g.
20 g QK).
Weight ID Defines the identification (ID) of the weight (max. 20 characters). Any
Note (Define)*
The weight ID is shown in the balance certificate. The ID can also
contain a company-specific identification or test equipment num
ber.
44 System Settings
Class Selects the predefined class. E1* | E2 | F1 | F2 | M1 |
Note M2 | M3 | ASTM1 |
Own can be selected if no other class can be used. ASTM2 | ASTM3 |
ASTM4 | ASTM5 |
ASTM6 | ASTM7 | Own
Certificate No. Defines the certificate number of the external test weight used Any
(max. 20 characters). (Define)*
Weight Set No. Defines the identification number of the set of weights if the test Any
weight belongs to a set of weights (max. 20 characters). (Define)*
Actual Value Weight from the weight certificate. Irrespective of the type of bal Weight
ance, the full value should be taken over without taking the deci (0 g)*
mal places of the balance into account (e.g. 20.00124 g).
Note
Methods use the actual value; this is rounded to the maximum
decimal places of the balance and used for calculation.
Next Recalibra Entry of the date of the next weight calibration. DD.MM.YYYY
tion Note (31.12.2099)*
If no weight calibration is planned, the default value
(31.12.2099) should be maintained .
* Factory setting
5.2.3 Test sequences
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences
Test sequences define which test is carried out with which test weight. The user is guided through the test with
the display of clear instructions.
Note
The test should be carried out according to GWP® or other QM systems. The behavior of the balance must also
be defined for configuration of the test sequence.
When Test Sequences is selected, a list of test sequences, the parameters of which can be adapted or overwrit
ten, is displayed.
Up t o 12 test sequences can be defined.
The test weights required for the test are defined in the Test/Adj. Weights menu.
1 Tap [Define].
Test Sequences window is displayed.
2 Select an undefined or existing test sequence to be configured or adapted.
3 Tap [Define].
Test Sequence window is displayed.
4 Enter the designations and parameters and confirm with [OK].
The test sequence is stored in the Test Sequence menu.
Each time a test sequence is stored, the version number is increased by 1. The version number is
shown at the top right of the display.
System Settings 45
Test Sequence 1 Defines the parameters for Test Sequence 1 … See Configuration of test sequence
… Test Test Sequence 12. parameters (page 46)
Sequence 12
Note
When the test sequence list is displayed, all parameters of the 12 test sequences can be printed with [ ].
5.2.3.1 Configuration of test sequence parameters

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1
Menu structure
Test Sequence 1 Name see Name (page 46)
Preparation Instructions see Preparations (page 46)
Method see Method (page 47)
Action if Failure see Error action (page 59)
Instructions if Failure see Error instructions (page 61)
Code to Unblock see Release code (page 61)
Entry in GWP History see Entry in GWP history (page 61)
5.2.3.1.1 Name
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Name
Name Defines a designation for a test sequence (max. 20 characters). Any
Note (Test Sequence 1)*
The name must be comprehensible to enable clear identification
and easy traceability.
* Factory setting
5.2.3.1.2 Preparations
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Preparation Instruc
tions
Preparation Selection of preparatory instructions. None* | Standard
Instructions None = no preparatory instructions are displayed in the test
sequence.
This is normally used for test sequences requiring no user
actions, e.g. test sequences with the SERVICE method.
Standard = the following preparatory instructions are displayed
in the test sequence. These correspond to the typical SOP stan
dard. The instructions must be followed and confirmed with [OK]
before the rest of the test sequence can be continued.
The Name test sequence was started.
Follow the instructions below:
1. Clean the weighing pan. 2. Level the balance. 3. Switch on
the printer. 4. Have the test weights ready. 5. Have the weight
tweezers/fork ready. When all instructions have been followed,
confirm with [OK] and follow further test sequence instructions.
46 System Settings
* Factory setting
5.2.3.1.3 Method
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method
A method describes the type of test to be carried out and defines the main purpose of a test sequence. The test
weights and respective tolerances to be used must be defined as part of the method. There are 8 different meth
ods available.
None No method has been selected.
EC Method for eccentric load test. see EC Method for eccentric load test
(page 49)
RP1 Method for repeatability test. see RP1 Method for repeatability test
(page 50)
RPT1 Method for repeatability test with tare weight. see RPT1 Method for repeatability
test with tare weight (page 51)
SE1 Method for sensitivity test with one test weight. see SE1 Method for sensitivity test
with one test weight (page 53)
SE2 Method for sensitivity test with two test weights. see SE2 Method for sensitivity test
with two test weights (page 54)
SERVICE Service method. see SERVICE method reminder/pre-
warning time (page 55)
SET1 Method for sensitivity test with tare weight and one see SET1 Method for sensitivity test
test weight. with tare weight and one test weight
(page 57)
SET2 Method for sensitivity test with tare weight and two see SET2 Method for sensitivity test
test weights. with tare weight and two test weights
(page 58)
The EC, RP1, RPT1, SE1, SE2, SET1 and SET2 methods require the definition of one or more test weights and
the respective tolerances.
Note
The SERVICE method requires no test weights.
The test weights required for the test are defined in the Test/Adj. Weights menu.
1 Select a method (example EC).
2 Select the test weight for the test.
3 Define the test tolerances for the test weight.
4 Define the result tolerances for the method result.
5 To store the settings, tap [OK].
Attention
It is important to distinguish between the test tolerances of the individual weight measurements during the test
sequence and the result tolerances (method tolerances) for the final result EC, RP1 and RPT1 methods). For
these methods, two further tolerances are applied to the test sequence result. These two tolerances are equally
defined and applied, as for the test tolerances.
Note
If a method is used that calculates a final result, it is recommended to exclude the test and tare weight toler
ances so that the complete test sequence is carried out and the result tolerance (method tolerance) T2 is
applied.
System Settings 47
Weights
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > Method >
Test Weight
Test/Adj. Weight Selects the predefined test weight. Test/Adj. Weight 1 |
Test/Adj. Weight 1 … Test/Adj. Weight12 = defined in Test/Adj. Test/Adj. Weight 2 |
Weights menu item. Test/Adj. Weight 3 |
Test/Adj. Weight 4 |
Test/Adj. Weight10 |
Test/Adj. Weight12
Tare Weight Selects the predefined test weight corresponding to the tare con Test/Adj. Weight 1 |
tainer weight. Test/Adj. Weight 2 |
Test/Adj. Weight12
Tolerances
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > Method >
Tolerances
Menu structure
Tolerances Tolerance T1 See Section, Definition of test toler
Name T1 ances
Tolerance T2
Name T2
Definition of test tolerances
Defines the test weight tolerance. Each test weight has two corresponding tolerances (T1 and T2), which are
applied during a test sequence.
48 System Settings
Tolerance T1 Defines the weight measuring tolerance T1. Any
The tolerance T1 is used as a warning for the user and should
not be less than T2. If this tolerance is exceeded, a warning is
generated. The user can end the test sequence. A record of this
warning is stored in the test history and printed in the report. If T1
is not to be defined as part of the test sequence, it can be deacti
vated by setting to 100%.
Note
The minimum value for the tolerance T1 depends on the type of
balance and is one digit.
Name T1 Defines a designation for T1 (max. 20 characters). Any
(Warn Limit)*
Tolerance T2 Defines the weight measuring tolerance T2. Any
When tolerance T2 is reached, the test sequence is aborted. A
message is displayed informing the user that the test has failed.
The error is stored in the test history and printed in the protocol. If
T2 is not to be defined as part of the test sequence, it can be
deactivated by setting to 100%.
Note
The minimum value for the tolerance T2 depends on the type of
balance and is one digit.
Name T2 Defines a designation for T2 (max. 20 characters). Any
(Control Limit)*
* Factory setting
Note
When the test menu is open, a complete list of settings can be printed with [ ].
EC Method for eccentric load test

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [EC]
The purpose of the EC method (eccentric load test) is to ensure that every eccentric load deviation is within the
necessary user SOP tolerances.
The method uses two result tolerances (method tolerances), s T1 and s T2, which are applied to the test
sequence result. They function similar to T1 and T2.
Menu structure
Test Weight Test/Adj. Weight See Section, Test weight
Tolerances See Method (page 47)
Tolerance for Eccentricity Dev. Tolerance EC T1 See Section, Tolerances for eccentric
Name EC T1 load deviation
Tolerance EC T2
Name EC T2
Test Weight
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [EC] > Test
Weight > Test/Adj. Weight
System Settings 49
Test/Adj. Weight12
Tolerances The tolerances T1 and T2 apply to individual weight measure Tolerance T1 | Name
ment and not to eccentric load calculation. T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Note Name T2
If the eccentric load test is to be completed, also in the event of
an error, T2 must be set to 100%.
Tolerances for eccentric load deviation

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [EC] > Test
Weight > Tolerance for Eccentricity Dev.
Tolerance EC T1 Defines the tolerance EC T1 for the eccentric load deviation. Any
If the result tolerance (method tolerance) EC T1 is exceeded, the (0.10 g)*
eccentric load test is passed with a warning.
Name EC T1 Defines a designation for EC T1 (max. 20 characters). Any
(Warn Limit)*
Tolerance EC T2 Defines the tolerance EC T2 for the eccentric load deviation. Any
If the result tolerance (method tolerance) T2 is exceeded, the (0.10 g)*
eccentric load test fails.
Name EC T2 Defines a designation for EC T2 (max. 20 characters). Any
(Control Limit)*
* Factory setting
RP1 Method for repeatability test

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [RP1]
The RP1 method calculates the mean and standard deviation (Symbol s) of a series of measurements with a
single test weight in order to determine the repeatability of the balance.
Menu structure
Tolerances (s) Tolerance s T1 See Section, Tolerances (s) for
Name s T1 repeatability test
Tolerance s T2
Name s T2
Number of Repetitions no submenu See Section, Number of repetitions
50 System Settings
Test Weight
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [RP1] >
Test Weight > Test/Adj. Weight
Test/Adj. Weight12
Tolerances The test weight tolerances apply to all individual weights, but are Tolerance T1 | Name
not applied to the standard deviation as this is calculated. T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Note Name T2
If the repeatability test is to be completed, also in the event of an
error, the test weight tolerances must be set to 100%.
Tolerances (s) for repeatability test

Test Weight > Tolerances (s)
Tolerance s T1 Defines the tolerance s T1 for the repeatability test. Any
If the tolerance s T1 is exceeded, the repeatability test is passed (0.000 g)*
with a warning.
Name s T1 Defines a designation for s T1 (max. 20 characters). Any
(Warn Limit)*
Tolerance s T2 Define the tolerance s T2 for the repeatability test. Any
If the tolerance s T2 is exceeded, the repeatability test fails. (0.000 g)*
(Control Limit)*
* Factory setting
Number of Repetitions
Test Weight > Number of Repetitions
Number of Rep Defines the number of weight measurements of a series. 2 … 15
etitions (10)*
* Factory setting
RPT1 Method for repeatability test with tare weight

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [RPT1]
System Settings 51
The RPT1 method calculates the mean and standard deviation (Symbol s) of a series of measurements with
two test weights in order to determine the repeatability. In contrast to the RP1 method, a second test weight is
used to simulate the use of a tare container.
Menu structure
Tare Weight Test/Adj. Weight See Section, Tare weight
Tolerances (s) Tolerance s T1 See Section, Tolerances (s) for
Name s T1 repeatability test
Tolerance s T2
Name s T2
Number of Repetitions no submenu See Section, Number of repetitions
Tare Weight
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [RPT1] >
Tare Weight > Test/Adj. Weight
Test/Adj. Weight12
Tolerances It is recommended to set the tare weight tolerances to 100%. Tolerance T1 | Name
T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Name T2
Test Weight
52 System Settings
Test/Adj. Weight12
Tolerances The test weight tolerances are applied to each single value, but Tolerance T1 | Name
not to the standard deviation. T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Note Name T2
If the repeatability test is to be completed, also in the event of an
error, the test weight tolerances must be set to 100%.
Tolerances (s) for repeatability test

Test Weight > Tolerances (s)
Tolerance s T1 Defines the tolerance s T1 for the repeatability test. Any
If the tolerance s T1 is exceeded, the repeatability test is passed (0.000 g)*
with a warning.
(Warn Limit)*
Tolerance s T2 Define the tolerance s T2 for the repeatability test. Any
If the tolerance s T2 is exceeded, the repeatability test fails. (0.000 g)*
(Control Limit)*
* Factory setting
Number of Repetitions
Test Weight > Number of Repetitions
Number of Rep Defines the number of weight measurements of a series. 2 … 15
etitions (10)*
* Factory setting
SE1 Method for sensitivity test with one test weight

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [SE1]
The SE1 method tests the sensitivity of the balance with one test weight.
Menu structure
System Settings 53
Test Weight
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [SE1] >
Test/Adj. Weight12
Tolerances The test tolerances are used for the sensitivity test. Tolerance T1 | Name
T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Name T2
SE2 Method for sensitivity test with two test weights

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [SE2]
The SE2 method tests the sensitivity of the balance with two test weights.
Menu structure
Test Weight 1 Test/Adj. Weight See Section, Test weight 1
Test Weight 1
Test Weight 1 > Test/Adj. Weight
Test/Adj. Weight Selection of the first predefined test weight. Test/Adj. Weight 1 |
Test/Adj. Weight12
T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Name T2
54 System Settings
Test Weight 2
Test/Adj. Weight Selects the second predefined test weight. Test/Adj. Weight 1 |
Test/Adj. Weight12
T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Name T2
SERVICE method reminder/pre-warning time

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [SERVICE]
The SERVICE method is a special method that requires no test weight. It is normally set to perform regular
checks of various data (dates) in the background. It usually ends automatically without any user action and
displayed messages. It is normally used as a reminder for the next service date or MinWeigh date. The date is
checked on a regular basis and a message is only displayed when the defined task is due. The SERVICE
method can also be used to draw early attention to a due test appropriate to the pre-warning time.
The SERVICE method can also only be used for the display of Preparation Instructions. For example, the user
is requested to level the balance on a daily basis. In this special case, the Preparation Instructions must be
set in the test sequence setting to Standard. Ensure that no elements are selected in the method status.
See Configuration of test sequence parameters (page 46).
Note
To enable this test sequence to be ended without user actions, Preparation Instructions must be set in the test
sequence to None.
Status Defines the data (dates) to be checked in this test See Section, Status
sequence.
Note
Multiple selections are possible for all available
options. The user receives a message when this
task is due.
Early Warning Defines the alarm pre-warning time. See Parameter table
Alert
System Settings 55
Status
Menu structure
Status Battery Change See Parameter table
Service
MinWeigh
Weight
Task 1
Task 2
Task 3
Task 4
Task 5
Task 6
Task 7
Task 8
Task 9
Task 10
Task 11
Task 12
Early Warning Alert no submenu
Battery Change Date of next battery replacement. (deactivated)* |
(activated)
Service Date of next service. (deactivated)* |
(activated)
MinWeigh Date of next MinWeigh. (deactivated)* |
(activated)
Weight Date of next calibration (for all test weights). (deactivated)* |
(activated)
Task 1 … Task Date of next task display. (deactivated)* |
12 Settings for task configuration, see Tasks (page 62). (activated)
Early Warning Defines how early the alarm is to be generated. The battery 1 … 365 days
Alert replacement reminder can be displayed, e.g. 7 days prior to the (7 days)*
due date.
If the test is passed in the pre-warning period, it is recorded as
"passed with warning". If the pre-warning period has expired, the
test is failed. Further instructions, see Error instructions
(page 61).
Note
When using the pre-warning time as a reminder for other tasks, 2
tasks are required - one for the original test sequence and one for
the reminder.
With the SERVICE method, several dates can be checked simul
taneously, see Multiple selection under Status. The same pre-
warning time applies to all dates however. If different pre-warning
times are necessary, several SERVICEmethods must be defined.
The reminder task is created to regularly check the data. Select
the test frequency in relation to the pre-warning period and fre
quency of the test sequence being carried out.
56 System Settings
* Factory setting
SET1 Method for sensitivity test with tare weight and one test weight
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [SET1]
The SET1 method tests the sensitivity of the balance with two test weights. The first test weight is used to simu
late a tare container.
Menu structure
Tare Weight
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [SET1] >
Note Test/Adj. Weight 5 |
A check is initially carried out to see whether the tare weight is Test/Adj. Weight 6 |
within the predefined weight tolerances. Whilst on the balance, Test/Adj. Weight 7 |
the test weight is used to determine the sensitivity. Test/Adj. Weight 8 |
Test/Adj. Weight12
T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Name T2
Test Weight
Test/Adj. Weight12
System Settings 57
T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Name T2
SET2 Method for sensitivity test with tare weight and two test weights
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Method > [SET2]
The SET2 method tests the sensitivity of the balance with three test weights. The second test weight (tare
weight) is used to simulate a tare container.
Menu structure
Test Weight 1
Test/Adj. Weight Selection of the first predefined test weight. Test/Adj. Weight 1 |
Test/Adj. Weight12
T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Name T2
Tare Weight
58 System Settings
Note Test/Adj. Weight 5 |
A check is initially carried out to see whether the tare weight is Test/Adj. Weight 6 |
within the predefined weight tolerances. Whilst on the balance, Test/Adj. Weight 7 |
the test weight is used to determine the sensitivity. Test/Adj. Weight 8 |
Test/Adj. Weight12
T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Name T2
Test Weight 2
Test/Adj. Weight Selects the second predefined test weight. Test/Adj. Weight 1 |
Test/Adj. Weight12
T1 | Tolerance T2 |
Name T2
5.2.3.1.4 Error action
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Action if Failure
Defines how the balance should react if the test fails or is aborted. There are 3 types of behavior.
Menu structure
None no submenu
Warning Warning Message See Section, Warning
Time Interval
Max. Number Of Warnings
Action after Failure
Attempts 1 See Section, Attempts
2
3
Until Passed
System Settings 59
Warning
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Action if Failure >
Warning
Warning Mes Defines the warning dialog for the user. Standard* | Advanced
sage The user can work as normal, but receives repeated warnings
that the test sequence has failed. The user is requested to restart
the test sequence.
The dialog window with the warning dialog also contains a
[Start] button for restarting the test sequence.
Standard = the test sequence Name has failed. Start the test
sequence again.
Advanced = the test sequence Name has failed. Follow the steps
below:
1. Check the weighing parameters. 2. Start the test sequence
again via function key or directly via the [Start] button.
Note
● To start the test sequence via the function key, the [Test
Sequence] function key must be activated.
● If the [Start] button is deactivated (grayed), the current user
is not authorized to start the test sequence.
Time Interval Defines the time (in hours) until the warning is displayed again. 1 … 1000 h
(1 h)*
Max. Number Of Defines the maximum permitted number of warnings for this test 1 … 1000
Warnings sequence. (1)*
When the maximum number is reached and the test sequence
was not successfully completed, the balance is blocked.
Action after Fail Defines how a test sequence (already in warning mode) should None* | 1 Attempt | 2
ure behave if it fails again or is aborted during the method sequence. Attempts | 3 Attempts |
None = the test sequence is aborted and restarted after lapse of Until Passed
the next warning interval.
See Max. Number Of Warnings.
1 Attempt, 2 Attempts or 3 Attempts = in contrast to None, the
balance does not return to the warning mode. The test sequence
must be passed within the number of attempts defined here or the
balance will be blocked.
Until Passed = permits an unlimited number of attempts. The
balance does not return to the warning mode.
Note
If GWP History is activated, only the last result and number of
attempts are stored.
* Factory setting
Attempts
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Action if Failure >
Attempts
60 System Settings
Attempts Defines how often a test may be carried out until it is passed. 1* | 2 | 3 | Until
1, 2 or 3 = the test must be passed within the defined number of Passed
attempts or the balance is blocked.
In contrast to Warning, it is not possible to continue to work with
the balance between attempts, but only when the test has been
passed.
Until Passed = permits an unlimited number of attempts.
Note
If GWP History is activated, only the last result and number of
attempts are stored.
* Factory setting
Note
On successful completion of the test sequence, no more warning dialogs are displayed. If a specific test
sequence blocks the balance, the warning mode is cancelled on release so that no further warning messages
are displayed.
5.2.3.1.5 Error instructions
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Instructions if Failure
Defines instructions for the user, which are displayed if the test was unsuccessful.
Instructions if Defines the instructions. None* | Standard
Failure This setting is independent of the parameters Action if Failure
and is displayed each time a test sequence fails.
None = the test sequence Name has failed.
Standard = the test sequence Name has failed.
The balance is outside the defined tolerances.
Contact a responsible person within your company or METTLER
TOLEDO service.
* Factory setting
5.2.3.1.6 Release code
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Code to Unblock
If the system is blocked due to a failed test sequence (corresponding to the Action if Failure settings), the test
sequence can be released with Code to Unblock.
Code to Unblock System release. Any
Note (Z)*
If Action if Failure None is selected, a failed test sequence will
never block the balance.
* Factory setting
5.2.3.1.7 Entry in GWP history

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test Sequences > Test Sequence 1 > Entry in GWP History
System Settings 61
The GWP history can store up to 120 test results. Due to this limitation, it may not be necessary to store test
sequence results that have no quality references, e.g. test sequences with the SERVICE method.
Entry in GWP Defines whether the test result is stored in the GWP history. Yes | No*
History Yes = result of test sequence is stored.
No = result of test sequence is not stored.
Note
If 120 entries are exceeded, the oldest result is overwritten with
the newest result.
* Factory setting
5.2.4 Tasks
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Tasks
Tasks define when a test sequence must be carried out and how it is started.
Up to 12 tasks can be defined.
The test sequence is defined in the Test Sequence menu.
1 Tap [Define].
The Tasks window is displayed.
2 Select the test sequence for the task.
The Task State window is displayed.
When a test sequence is assigned to a task, the name appears in the task list.
3 Tap [On] and subsequently the associated button.
Task window is displayed.
4 Define the settings and confirm with [OK].
The date for carrying out the next test sequence is recalculated.
The date for carrying out the next test is calculated at the end of each completed test sequence.
Task 1 … Task Defines the tasks for the test sequence. See Task status (page 62)
12
Note
When the task list is displayed, all parameters of the 12 tasks can be printed with [ ].
5.2.4.1 Task status
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Tasks > Task 1
The task can be activated or deactivated in the task status window. Deactivated tasks are ignored by the sys
tem. Activated tasks can be changed or supplemented.
Task 1 Defines the task status. Off* | On
* Factory setting
62 System Settings
Off No task.
On Assign a test sequence to a task. See Assigning a test sequence to a
task. (page 63)
Note
When the task status is open, a complete list of settings can be printed with [ ].
5.2.4.2 Assigning a test sequence to a task.

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Tasks > Task 1 > [On]
When Test Sequence is selected, the user can assign a test sequence to a task from a list of already defined
test sequences.
Menu structure
Test Sequence no submenu
Starting Method Defines the starting mode of a task. See Starting method (page 63)
Defined Days Defines the day on which the task is See Defined days (page 65)
to be performed.
Defined Users Defines the users authorized to start See Defined users (page 66)
the task.
Test Sequence Selects a predefined test sequence. Task 1 | Task 2 | Task
Test Sequence 1 … Test Sequence 12 = defined in Test 3 | Task 4 | Task 5 |
Sequences menu item. Task 6 | Task 7 | Task
8 | Task 9 | Task 10 |
Task 11 | Task 12
5.2.4.3 Starting method
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Tasks > Task 1 > [On] > Starting Method
A test sequence defined in the task can be started in 4 different ways.
Menu structure
Starting Method Manual See Section, Manual
On User Change See Section, Change of user
Interval See Section, Interval
On Power On See Section, Switching on
Manual
The test sequence can be started as required by pressing the [Test Sequence] function key on the main display
of the balance.
System Settings 63
Manual Defines the manual starting method. None
Note
● The day on which the test sequence can be started is defined
in the Defined Days task settings, seeDefined days
(page 65).
● Defined in the Defined Users task settings are the users
authorized to start the test sequence, seeDefined users
(page 66).
On User Change
The test sequence is displayed with a change of user.
On User Change Defines the starting method. None
Note
● If the day on which a change of user takes place is not acti
vated in the Defined Days task setting, the test sequence is
not carried out. See Defined days (page 65).
● If a user is not selected in the Defined Users task setting, the
test sequence is not carried out. See Defined users
(page 66).
Interval
Defines the interval in which the balance automatically starts the test sequence.
If the date/time of the terminal is changed, it is recommended to recalculate the already calculated next interval-
task display dates. Carry out the following steps:
1 Go to the respective task menu of the interval-task and subsequently tap the associated button.
2 Tap [Off].
The next due date is deleted.
4 Return to the just closed task menu.
5 Tap [On].
The next due date is recalculated and the task is active again.
Note
Repeat these steps for all interval-tasks.
Menu structure
Interval Interval Start Time See Parameter table
Interval
64 System Settings
Interval Start Defines the time of day when the test is to be carried out. 0:00 … 23:59
Time Note (08:00)*
To ensure that a test is completed before working with the bal
ance, the starting time should be set earlier than necessary.
Example
The starting time is set at 7:00 when work begins at about 8:00.
Interval Defines the intervals in days between the tests. 1 Day … 720 Days
Note (1 day)*
If a test cannot be carried out as scheduled, because it falls on a
public holiday, the test remains due. If the test falls due again up
until its completion, it only needs to be carried out once.
Example
A daily task must only be performed once on Monday, even if a
request from the previous Saturday or Sunday is still due.
* Factory setting
On Power On
If active, the test sequence is started when the balance is switched on. This can be useful in situations where
the balance is disconnected from the mains supply or in the event of a general power failure.
On Power On Activates the test sequence. None
5.2.4.4 Defined days
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Tasks > Task 1 > [On] > Defined Days
Defines the day on which the task is to be performed. Irrespective of the starting method, the task is only per
formed on specific days,
Important
Warning dialogs for failed tests are also displayed on undefined days! The test sequence can be started directly
from the warning dialog, provided the current user is defined.
See Defined users (page 66).
Defined Days Defines the day on which the task is to be performed. Monday* | Tuesday* |
Note Wednesday* | Thurs
day* | Friday* | Satur
● Test sequences with the Manual starting method appear in day* | Sunday*
the test selection list only on the days defined here, see Start
(deactivated) |
ing method (page 63).
(activated)*
● Test sequences with the On User Change starting method are
only displayed on the days defined here.
● Test sequences with the Interval starting method are only dis
played on the days defined here. If the day on which a test
sequence is due is not defined, the test sequence is post
poned until the next defined day.
* Factory setting
System Settings 65
5.2.4.5 Defined users
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Tasks > Task 1 > [On] > Defined Users
Defines the users authorized to start the task. Irrespective of the starting method, only selected users can per
form the task.
Important
All users receive warnings of failed or aborted tests. Warning dialogs are only generated for test sequences, if
these are configured with a Action if Failure warning.
See Error action (page 59).
Defined Users Defines the users authorized to start the task. Home* | User 1* | User
Note 2* | User 3* | User 4* |
User 5* | User 6* |
● Test sequences with the Manual starting method appear in User 7*
the test selection list only for the defined users selected here.
(deactivated) |
● Test sequences with On User Change start methods are only
(activated)*
displayed when the new user belongs to the users selected
here.
● Test sequences with Interval start methods are only dis
played when the new user belongs to the users selected here.
If the user is not defined, the test sequence is postponed until
a defined user registers.
* Factory setting
5.2.5 ProFACT/int. Adjustment
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > ProFACT / Int. Adj.
ProFACT stands for Professional Fully Automatic Calibration Technology and offers fully automatic internal bal
ance adjustment with an internal weight, based on preselected time and/or temperature criteria.
ProFACT / Int. Adj. is switched on by default and can be switched off as required.
1 Under ProFACT / Int. Adj., tap the associated button.
2 Tap [ProFACT / Int. Adj.] and subsequently the [Define] button.
ProFACT window is displayed.
ProFACT / Int. Defines the behavior of the ProFACT adjustment See Definition of parameters for
Adj. function. ProFACT (page 66)
5.2.5.1 Definition of parameters for ProFACT

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > ProFACT / Int. Adj. > [ProFACT / Int. Adj.]
Note
With approved balances (according to OIML accuracy class II), ProFACT / Int. Adj. cannot be switched off.
Menu structure
Off no submenu
66 System Settings
ProFACT / Int. Adj. Weekdays See Parameter table
Time 1
Time 2
Time 3
Temp.Criterion
Protocol Trigger
Advanced Options See Extended options (page 67)
Weekdays Define the days on which fully automatic calibration is to be per Monday* | Tuesday* |
formed. Wednesday* | Thurs
If time-controlled adjustment is not required, deactivate all days. day* | Friday* | Satur
day* | Sunday*
(deactivated) |
(activated)*
Time 1 1. Defines the time for automatic adjustment. Off | Time 1*
Note 0:00 … 23:59
Up to 3 different times can be defined for the selected days. (9:00)*
Time 2 2. Defines the time for automatic adjustment. Off* | Time 2

0:00 … 23:59
Time 3 3. Defines the time for automatic adjustment. Off* | Time 3
0:00 … 23:59
Temp.Criterion Defines the temperature difference, which initiates automatic Off | 0.5 Kelvin | 1
adjustment. Kelvin | 2 Kelvin* | 3
Kelvin
Protocol Trigger Defines when a protocol is to be printed automatically. On* | Off
On = protocol is automatically printed when automatic adjust
ment is initiated.
Off = no printing.
Advanced This function can be used to extend ProFACT and internal adjust Off* | On
Options ment procedures with internal tests.
* Factory setting
5.2.5.2 Extended options
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > ProFACT / Int. Adj. > [ProFACT / Int. Adj.] > Advanced
Options
Adjustment can be adapted to suit particular requirements by activating the extension option function.
Menu structure
Off no submenu
On As Found See Parameter table
Levelcontrol
As Left
Tolerances
Blocking
Code to Unblock
System Settings 67
As Found Activates the input test. No* | Yes
At the start of the adjustment sequence, an internal test (sensitivi
ty) is performed to ascertain the actual status. The input test is
automatically started when the adjustment sequence is activated
and the result is displayed and recorded.
Levelcontrol Activates leveling. No* | Yes
The level of the balance is checked.
Note
If no level sensor is available or the balance is not leveled, the
user is requested to check the level of the balance. The adjust
ment sequence is stopped until the user confirms the request.
As Left Activates the output test. No* | Yes
When adjustment is complete, an internal test (sensitivity) is per
formed from anew.
Tolerances Defines the tolerances. Tolerance T1 | Name
Defines the tolerances applied during the input test and output T1 | Tolerance T2 |
test, see Method (page 47). Name T2
Blocking Blocks the balance. No* | Yes
Defines whether the balance is to be blocked after exceeding the
tolerance T2 in the input test or output test or after aborting
adjustment. If the balance is blocked, it cannot be used until it is
released with the appropriate release code.
Code to Unblock Releases the balance. Any
Defines the code required to release a balance that has been (Z)*
blocked due to an input test, adjustment or output test error.
* Factory setting
5.2.6 Automatic adjustment with an external test weight

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Autom. ext. Adjust.
If work is carried out with an external test weight, this setting can be used to define days and times when the
balance requests adjustment. Further information on the (automatic) adjustment process with an external
test/adjustment weight can be found underAdjustment with external test weight (page 120).
1 Under Autom. ext. Adjust., tap the associated button.
2 Tap [On] and subsequently the [Define] button.
Autom. ext. Adjust. window is displayed.
Autom. ext. Defines the behavior of the adjustment function. See Definition of parameters for auto
Adjust. matic adjustment (page 68)
5.2.6.1 Definition of parameters for automatic adjustment

The behavior of the automatic external adjustment function can be set by tapping the [Define] button.
Menu structure
Off no submenu
68 System Settings
On Weekdays See Parameter table
Time
Weekdays Defines the days on which adjustment is to be carried out. Monday* | Tuesday |
Wednesday | Thursday
| Friday | Saturday |
Sunday
(deactivated) |
(activated)*
Time Defines the adjustment time. 0:00 … 23:59
The time for automatic adjustment can be entered for the selected (8:00)*
days.
* Factory setting
5.2.7 Testing the adjustment with an external test weight

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Autom. ext. Test
This setting can be used to enter days and times when testing of the adjustment with an external test weight is
to be performed and the balance displays a reminder message. Further information can be found under Testing
the adjustment with external test weight (page 122).
1 Under Autom. ext. Test, tap the associated button.
Autom. ext. Test window is displayed.
Autom. ext. Test Defines the behavior of the test function. See Definition of parameters for test
ing the adjustment (page 69)
5.2.7.1 Definition of parameters for testing the adjustment

The behavior of the automatic external test function can be set by tapping the [Define] button.
Menu structure
Off no submenu
On Weekdays See Parameter table
Time
Weekdays Defines the days on which the adjustment test is to be performed. Monday* | Tuesday |
Wednesday | Thursday
| Friday | Saturday |
Sunday
(deactivated) |
(activated)*
Time Defines the test time. 0:00 … 23:59
The time can be entered for the selected days. (9:00)*
System Settings 69
* Factory setting
5.2.8 Test history
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Test History
The balance always records all adjustment data and the required results of performed tests and stores these in
a special fail-safe memory. The options in the test history allow the selection of results for documentation or
printing.
Note
When the memory is full (120 entries for the GWP history), the oldest entries are automatically deleted and
overwritten by new entries. It is important to ensure that entries required for the documentation standards are
printed and archived to ensure full traceability of the performed tests and adjustments.
1 Under Test History, tap the [Define] button.
Test History window is displayed.
Menu structure
Test History Adj. History See Section Adjustment History
Adj. History Selection See Section Adjustment History
selection
GWP History See Section GWP History
Adj. History
A window with a list of performed adjustments can be displayed by tapping [Show]. Although the balance per
manently records all adjustments made, only those selected for display in Adj. History Selection are listed.
Specific data is displayed for each adjustment: date and time, type of adjustment, temperature, leveling. The
complete list can be printed with [ ] .
Adj. History Displays the performed adjustments. Show
Adj. History Selection
Menu structure
Adj. History Selection Selection See Parameter table
Display Datasets
Selection Selects the results to be stored. Manual adjust.* | Tem
Select the adjustments to be displayed in the adjustment history. perature* | Time
The list can be selectively shortened (including printout) for Adjust.*
improved clarity. (deactivated) |
Note (activated)*
The balance records all adjustment operations. The settings in
this menu define the operations to be displayed in the list.
Display Datasets Defines the number of displayed datasets. Last 50* | Last 40 |
Last 30 | Last 20 | Last
10
* Factory setting
70 System Settings
GWP History
A window with a list of test sequence results can be displayed by tapping Show]. The currently displayed result
can be scrolled with the [q] und [p] keys. The previous or next result can be displayed with the [>>] and
[<<] keys. The displayed entry can be printed with [ ]. The GWP history can store maximum 120 entries.
Only the results of test sequences are stored where the GWP history was set to [Yes].
See Entry in GWP history (page 61).
GWP History Displays the history entries Show
5.2.9 Protocol – Definition of adjustment and test reports

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Adjust/Test] > Protocol
Information to be printed in the adjustment and test reports can be defined in the settings.
1 Under Protocol, tap the [Define] button.
Adjustment and test protocol selection window is displayed.
3 To restore the factory default settings, tap [STD].
Protocol Defines the information to be printed in the protocol. See Parameter table
Date/Time The date and time of the adjustment/test are printed in the defined (deactivated) |
date and time format. (activated)*
User Name of the active user profile during the adjustment/test (not for (deactivated) |
automatic ProFact adjustment). (activated)*
Balance Type This information is stored in the balance and terminal cannot be (deactivated) |
changed by the user. (activated)*
SNR The serial numbers of the balance and terminal are printed. This (deactivated) |
information cannot be changed by the user. (activated)*
SW-Version The version numbers of the balance firmware (one number each (deactivated)* |
for the terminal and balance) are printed. (activated)
Balance ID The defined balance identification is printed. Balance information
settings (deactivated)* |
(activated)
Weight ID The identification number of the external test weight used. (deactivated)* |
(activated)
Certificate No. The certificate number of the external test weight used. (deactivated)* |
(activated)
Temperature Temperature at the time of adjustment or test. (deactivated)* |
(activated)
Nominal Weight Corresponds to the actual external test weight used for the adjust (deactivated) |
ment/test. (activated)*
Actual Weight The actual recorded weight of an external test weight (only if an (deactivated) |
external test weight was used for the test). (activated)*
System Settings 71
Difference Difference between the nominal and actual weight (only if an (deactivated) |
external test weight was used for the test). (activated)*
Levelcontrol Indicates whether the balance is correctly leveled. (deactivated)* |
(activated)
Signature A further line is printed for signing the protocol. (deactivated) |
(activated)*
* Factory setting
5.3 Balance information
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Info]
This menu can be used to define an identification for the balance and all balance information can be displayed.
Note
The [Info] function key can be used as a shortcut for the [Show] key.
See Selecting function keys (page 95).
1 Tap [Info] and subsequently the associated button.
Info window is displayed.
Balance ID Defines a designation for the balance (max. 20 characters). Any
This facilitates the identification of individual balances where sev
eral balances are used. This identification is also printed in the
protocols. Alphanumeric characters can be entered in the input
window.
Info Displays the balance information and built-in options. Show
This information is of particular importance for the service engi
neer. This information should be available before contacting
METTLER TOLEDO customer service.
Note
The balance information can be recorded (provided a printer is connected and activated as an output device in
the peripheral device settings) by pressing the [ ] button.
See Peripherals (page 73).
5.4 Standby
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Standby]
This menu can be used to define the time of balance inactivity after which the balance is automatically set to
the standby mode.
Attention
The balance must be unloaded before it can change to standby mode.
Note
Irrespective of the standby mode setting, the display brightness is automatically reduced if the balance remains
inactive for 15 minutes. If the displayed value should change during the course of 15 minutes (e.g. due to
vibrations), the balance waits a further 15 minutes until the display brightness is reduced.
1 Tap [Standby] and subsequently the [Off] button.
Standby window is displayed.
72 System Settings
Standby Defines the energy saving function Off* | 30 min. | 60
The standby mode corresponds to the state the balance assumes min. | 120 min. | 240
after being switched off with the [On/Off] button. The balance can min.
be switched on again by pressing the [On/Off] button.
* Factory setting
5.5 Date/Time
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Date/Time]
This menu can be used to set the date and time.
1 Tap [Date/Time] and subsequently the associated button.
Date/Time window is displayed.
Date format Sets the date format. D.MMM YYYY* | MMM
D = Day D YYYY | DD.MM.YYYY |
M = Month MM/DD/YYYY | YYYY-
Y = Year MM-DD | YYYY/MM/DD
Date Sets the date and time of the internal clock in the balance. Day | Month | Year
A numeric input window is displayed. Enter the current date in the
format day - month - year (DD.MM.YYYY), regardless of the date
format selected for the display.
Note
This setting can also be made directly by tapping the date in
weighing mode. A window is displayed in which the date can be
directly entered.
Time Format Sets the time format. 24:MM* | 12:MM |
24.MM | 12.MM
Time Sets the time on the balance. Hours | Minutes
M = Minutes
Enter the current time in a 24-hour format (24.MM.SS, entry of
the seconds is optional), regardless of the time format selected
for the display. The input window corresponds to that for the
date. The [+1H] and [–1H] keys can also be used for setting the
time an hour forward or back. This facilitates switching between
summer and winter time.
Note
This setting can also be made directly by tapping the time dis
play in the weighing mode.
* Factory setting
5.6 Peripherals
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Peripherals]
System Settings 73
Various peripheral devices can be connected to the balance interface(s). This menu can be used to define the
devices to be connected and interface parameters.
Each balance application supports specific peripheral devices. The control of peripheral devices can vary from
application to application.
Example
The METTLER TOLEDO programmable relay interface LC-I/O is supported by both [Statistics] and [Piececount
ing] applications; however, controlled differently by both applications. More information on the interaction of
balance applications with various external devices can be found in the Solution Guide, available online at
www.mt.com.
There are specific interface setting options for each of these devices. [Off] means that no device of this type is
connected. [RS232 built-in] denotes the default installed RS232C interface. If further optional interfaces are
available, these are displayed [RS232 Option]. At this point, only the parameters of the default installed
RS232C interface are described.
Important
Only a single device can be activated for each available interface; all devices must be deactivated [Off]. When
a new device is activated, the previously selected device is automatically deactivated.
1 Tap [Peripherals] and subsequently the associated button.
Peripherals window is displayed.
Printer Printer. Off* | RS232 built-in |
RS232 Option
Host External computer (bidirectional communication; the balance can Off | RS232 built-in* |
send data to the PC and receive commands or data from it). RS232 Option
LabX METTLER TOLEDO LabX software enables the definition of com Off* | RS232 built-in |
plete dialog-based balance operations and can store and man Ethernet Option
age measured values as well as further data in a database on
the PC.
LabX Controlled This interface is only used with LabX. Connected devices (e.g. Off* | RS232 built-in |
Device LV11 feeder) communicate directly with LabX). RS232 Option
Tablet Feeder METTLER TOLEDO LV11 tablet feeder. Off* | RS232 built-in |
RS232 Option
Secondary Dis Remote display. Off* | RS232 built-in |
play RS232 Option
Barcode Barcode scanner. Off* | RS232 built-in |
RS232 Option
RFID RFID reader. Off* | RS232 built-in |
RS232 Option
LC I/O METTLER TOLEDO programmable relay interface. Off* | RS232 built-in |
RS232 Option
* Factory setting
Note
Detailed information on optional interfaces and various peripheral devices can be found in the documentation
supplied with these products.
74 System Settings
When a device has been activated, the interface parameters for communication with this device, e.g. baud rate,
data format, stop bits, handshake, end-of-line character, character set and Continuous mode (only for periph
eral device Host) can be defined via the [Define] button.
These submenus are always displayed in English, irrespective of the dialog language selected.
Baudrate Defines the data transfer rate. 600 | 1200 | 2400 |
4800 | 9600* | 19200
Bit / Parity Defines the number of data bits and parity bits. 7/No | 7/Even | 7/Odd |
8/No*
Stop Bits Defines the stop bits for data transfer. 1 Stopbit* | 2 Stopbits
Handshake Defines the synchronization for data transfer None | Hardware |
Xon/Xoff*
End of line Defines the end-of-line character <CR><LF>* | <CR> |
<LF>
Char Set Defines the character set Ansi/Win* | IBM/DOS
Continuous Defines the transfer of weighing data Off* | On
mode
* Factory setting
Information on Continuous mode
In Continuous mode, the weighing data is continuously transferred via the interface. The Continuous mode is
only available for the peripheral device Host and default installed RS232C interface [RS232 built-in]. When
the Continuous mode is activated, additional setting options are available.
Output Format MT-SICS = the data is transferred in MT-SICS format (Mettler MT-SICS* | PM | AT/MT
Toledo Standard Interface Command Set). MT-SICS operates bidi
rectional, i.e. the balance can also receive confirmations or com
mands from the host. A separate reference manual is available
for MT-SICS.
PM = emulates the data format of PM balances (unidirectional).
AT/MT = the data is transferred in the format of METTLER TOLEDO
AT and MT balances (unidirectional).
Updates/sec. Defines the number of datasets transferred via the interface per 2 | 5* | 6 | 10
second.
* Factory setting
5.7 Option
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Option]
After the installation of specific interface options (e.g. Ethernet), an additional icon is displayed in the system
settings. Global interface settings can be made via [Option]. These are described in the instructions supplied
with the optional interface. This menu item contains only some basic information to help with general commu
nication problems.
Note
These submenus are always displayed in English, irrespective of the dialog language selected.
1 Tap [Option] and subsequently the associated button.
Option window is displayed.
System Settings 75
DHCP Activates/deactivates the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Off* | On
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is used to automatical
ly assign to the client PC a currently unused IP address from an
address pool. Other information such as the domain name, stan
dard gateway and specific DNS server can also be transferred to
the client.
IP-Adress Defines the IP address in the format "XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" Any
(X = 0 … 255).
The IP address must be distinctive within a corporate network
and conform to the conventions for IP addresses.
Subnet Mask Defines the subnet in the format "XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" Any
(X = 0 … 255).
The subnet mask is used to inform the routers within a network
which bits in the four quads in the IP address are significant for
routing in the search for the addressed computer within a specific
network.
Standard Gate Defines the Standard Gateway Address in the format Any
way "XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" (X = 0 … 255).
This may be necessary if the network is connected to another net
work via a router.
A gateway denotes the transition between two networks. A gate
way computer is a special computer connected to both networks.
Different protocols are converted in certain circumstances. A gate
way can also be a transition from a logical (often also purely
organizational) network to another, whereby both used the same
protocol.
Domain Name Defines the Domain Name Server Address in the format Any
Server "XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" (X = 0 … 255).
If domain names for calling network users are supported in the
TCP/IP network, the domain name server address must be
entered here.
Hostname Defines the computer or server. not available
General computer or server (on which specific user services are
normally provided). Often used for the computer to which a data
link has been established.
5.8 Administrator
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Administrator]
This menu can be used to change the administrator ID and password. A general reset of all balance settings
can be performed. Access rights for individual users can be allocated and specifications for recording safety-rel
evant procedures defined.
Note
This menu is protected ex works with an ID and a password.
5.8.1 Configuration of the security system

1 Tap [Administrator].
76 System Settings
Protected Area: Enter Administrator ID. window is displayed.
2 Enter the ID. Factory setting: Z.
Protected Area: Enter Admin. Password. window is displayed.
4 Enter the password. Factory setting: Z.
Administrator window is displayed.
Attention
The ID and password must always be entered in the defined language.
● If the dialog language is changed, it is possible that the access codes cannot be entered.
● If the balance is controlled with commands via an external host, the password protection is deactivated.
Administrator ID Changes the administrator ID. See Changing the administrator ID
and password (page 77)
Administrator Changes the administrator password. See Changing the administrator ID
Password and password (page 77)
Master Reset Resets the balance settings to the factory settings. See Performing a master reset
(page 78)
Rights Home Defines the access rights. See Definition of user access rights
(page 78)
Rights User 1 … Defines the access rights. See Definition of user access rights
Rights User 7 (page 78)
History Displays changes to protected settings. See Recording safety-relevant opera
tions (page 79)
Passw. Change Defines the date for changing a password. See Reminder function for changing
Date a password (page 80)
Number of users Defines the number of users. See Definition of the number of users
(page 80)
5.8.1.1 Changing the administrator ID and password

The Administrator ID and Administrator Password menu items can be used to change the ID and password
access codes defined by default.
Note
Both an ID and a password must be defined. If the existing code is deleted and no new code is entered, an
error message is displayed.
1 Tap Administrator ID and/or Administrator Password and subsequently the associated button.
The Administrator ID and/or Administrator Password window is displayed.
CAUTION

Remember IDs and passwords!

Protected menu areas cannot be accessed without ID or password.
– Note IDs and passwords and keep them in a safe place.
System Settings 77
Administrator ID Creates a new ID or changes an existing ID (max. 20 charac Any
ters). (Z)*
Administrator Creates new password or changes an existing password (max. Any
Password 20 characters). (Z)*
* Factory setting
5.8.1.2 Performing a master reset

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Administrator] > Master Reset
This menu item can be used to reset all balance settings to the factory settings. The date and time settings and
recorded adjustment operations are not affected.
CAUTION

Data loss after system reset.

After a master reset, the balance is reset to the factory settings. This means that all data such
as user and application-specific settings, system settings including administrator ID and
password are deleted.
1 Tap Master Reset.

Activate factory settings? window is displayed.
3 To abort, tap [C].
The balance restarts with the factory settings.

Master Reset Resets the balance to the factory settings. None
5.8.1.3 Definition of user access rights

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Administrator] > Rights Home
The Rights Home and Rights User 1 … Rights User 7 menu items can be used to define access rights and
select applications for all 8 user profiles.
Note
The user profile designations, e.g. Rights User 1 correspond to the factory setting; these can be changed in the
user-specific settings.
See User (page 85).
The user profile is selected.
1 Tap [Define].
3 To exit the settings, tap [OK].
After tapping the [Define] button, the menu areas protected with ID and password can be defined for the select
ed user profile.
Application Set All application-specific settings [ ]. No Protection* | User
up Protect. | Adm. Protect.
78 System Settings
Weighing para All weighing parameters available in the user-specific settings No Protection* | User
meters [ ]. Protect. | Adm. Protect.
Adjustweight Definition of external adjustment weights in the [Adjust/Test] No Protection* | User
system settings menu Protect. | Adm. Protect.
User Selects the user profile [ ]. No Protection* | User
Protect. | Adm. Protect.
User ID/Pass Definition of ID and password in the [User] user-specific settings No Protection* | User
word menu. Protect. | Adm. Protect.
System All system settings No Protection* | User
User Setting All user-specific settings [ ]. No Protection* | User
Application Selects the application [ ]. No Protection* | User
Application Defines the applications available for the selected user profile. Weighing* | Piece
Selection counting* | Percent* |
Formulation* |
Titration* | Density* |
Diff.weighing* |
Pipette Check* | Sta
tistics*
(deactivated) |
(activated)*
* Factory setting
Protection definition
Values Explanation
No Protection The menu area is freely accessible.
User Protect. A user ID and user password must be entered to display the respective menu area.
Note
All menu areas protected with a user ID and password can also be opened with the
administrator access codes.
Adm. Protect. An administrator ID and administrator password must be entered to display the
respective menu area.
5.8.1.4 Recording safety-relevant operations

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Administrator] > History
The balance is able to document changes to protected settings. The History menu item can be used to view a
list of these operations and switch recording on or off.
Note
When the memory is full (after about 50 recorded changes), the oldest operation is automatically deleted. If
laboratory standards or QA systems require complete traceability of all changes made, the list must be printed
and archived from time to time.
History Displays a list of changes made to protected settings. Specific Show
data is displayed for each change (date and time, user, change
made). The list can be printed by pressing the [ ] key.
Record Mode Switches recording on or off. Off* | On
* Factory setting
System Settings 79
5.8.1.5 Reminder function for changing a password
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Administrator] > Passw. Change Date
For security reasons, passwords should be changed regularly; this menu item can be used to define if and
when the balance is to generate a reminder to change passwords.
1 Select Request and subsequently tap the associated button.
A numeric input window is displayed.
2 Enter the date for the change of password and confirm with [OK].
When the selected date is reached, the message Administrator The password change date has been
reached. Please arrange changes is displayed.
Note
The administrator must ensure that all passwords are changed. The balance does not check this. If the mes
sage is deleted with [OK], it is displayed every 3 hours from anew until a new date is defined or the reminder
function is deactivated.
Passw. Change Activates/deactivates the reminder function. Off* | On
Date
Request Enter the date (in DD.MM.YYYY) on which the balance is to gen None
erate a reminder to change the password.
* Factory setting
5.8.1.6 Definition of the number of users

Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Administrator] > Number of users
This menu item can be used to define the user profiles available under the [ ] key. The user profile Home is
not displayed and cannot be deactivated.
1 Tap Number of users and subsequently the [Define] button.
The Number of users window is displayed.
2 Activate or deactivate the user and confirm with [OK].
Number of users Defines the number of users available in the user profile [ ]. User 1* | User 2* |
User 3* | User 4* |
User 5* | User 6* |
User 7*
(deactivated)* |
(activated)
* Factory setting
80 System Settings
5.9 Level sensor
Navigation: [ ] > [System] > [Levelcontrol]
The built-in level sensor permanently monitors the balance for correct horizontal alignment. This menu can be
used to activate or deactivate the level sensor and define the settings for the generation of warnings within
incorrect leveling.
Leveling information, see Leveling the balance (page 30).
1 Tap [Levelcontrol].
Levelcontrol window is displayed.
2 Tap [Levelcontrol] and subsequently the [Define] button.
Levelcontrol window is displayed.
3 Activate or deactivate the Warning Text and/or the Warning Beep.
Note
● The level sensor depends on the type of balance
● The level sensor cannot be switched off on some balances.
● The level sensor is coupled with the backlighting of the level indicator above the right foot screw. The level
indicator is illuminated when the level sensor is activated.
Menu structure
Off no submenu See Parameter table
Levelcontrol Warning Text
Warning Beep
Warning Text Defines whether and how often a warning text is to be displayed Off | Once* | Repeat
if the balance is not precisely leveled.
Warning Beep Defines if and how often an audible warning is to be generated if Off | Once* | Repeat
the balance is not precisely leveled.
* Factory setting
Warning text and audible warning settings
Values Explanation
Off If the level is incorrect, only the status icon appears at the top right of the display.
No warning text is displayed or audible warning generated.
Once If the level sensor detects incorrect leveling, the warning text is displayed or the
audible warning generated only once.
Repeat As long as the balance is not correctly leveled, the warning text or audible warning
is repeated every 15 minutes.
System Settings 81
6 User-specific Settings
Navigation: [ ]
This section describes the procedure for defining specific settings for each user. This allows the balance to be
adapted to the respective work technique and specific tasks.
To be noted is that all settings are stored under the active user profile and apply to working with all applications
within this profile. It must be ensured that the required user profile is selected. When a user profile is displayed,
the associated settings are automatically loaded.
1 To check the user profile, press [ ].
2 To print out the settings, press [ ].
Note
● The detail of the protocol depends on the point at which printout is activated in the system settings. Press
[ ] in the uppermost level of the user-specific settings; all settings are recorded. Start printing, e.g. in the
[Terminal] submenu; only settings for the terminal are recorded.
– To display the user-specific settings, press [ ].
The [User Setting] window is displayed.
Example: Printout
User Setting
Weighing parameters
Weighing Mode Universal
Environment Standard
Value Release
Reliable+Fast
AutoZero On
User
User Name Home
Language English
User ID 1
Terminal
Brightness 80
Colour selection
PaletteBlueCold
Sound 70
Touch Function On
Optical key feedback On
Speedread On
StatusLight
Brightness 60
Green status On
StatusLight On
6.1 Overview of user-specific settings

The user-specific settings are displayed in the form of symbols. The individual settings can be displayed and
changed by tapping the symbols.
Note
If this menu has been protected by the administrator, the appropriate ID and password must be entered.
1 Tap, e.g. [Terminal].
Terminal window is displayed.
82 System Settings
2 Select the required menu item (e.g. Sound).
6 To exit the [User Setting], tap [Exit] or press [ ].
Wghparam Settings for adjusting the balance to specific weighing conditions.
User Settings for the 8 different user profiles with respective information
(e.g. name, password, dialog language).
Door Settings for the motorized glass draft shield (depending on type).
Terminal Settings for the display (e.g. brightness) and for the behavior of
the terminal.
User Reset Reset all settings for the user profile to the factory settings.
Menu structure
Wghparam Weighing Mode See Weighing parameters (page 83)
Environment
Value Release
AutoZero
User User Name See User (page 85)
Language
User ID
Password
Door Door Function See Doors (page 87)
Doorway
Terminal Brightness See Terminal (page 88)
Colour selection
Sound
Touch Function
Touchadjust
Optical key feedback
Speedread
StatusLight
User Reset no submenu See User factory settings (page 91)
6.2 Weighing parameters
Navigation: [ ] > [Wghparam]
This menu can be used to adapt the balance to suit specific requirements.
1 Tap [Wghparam] and subsequently the associated button.
2 Settings can be changed by tapping the associated button.
User-specific Settings 83
Note
If access to this menu has been protected by the administrator, the appropriate ID and password must be
entered.
Weighing Mode Adapts the balance to the weighing mode. See Weighing mode (page 84)
Environment Adapts the balance to the ambient conditions and See Ambient conditions (page 84)
location.
Value Release Defines how quickly a stable measured value is See Measured value release
recognized by the balance as stable and released. (page 85)
AutoZero Activates/deactivates automatic zero correction. See AutoZero (page 85)
6.2.1 Weighing mode
Navigation: [ ] > [Wghparam] > Weighing Mode
This setting can be used to adapt the balance to the weighing mode.
Weighing Mode Defines the weighing mode. Universal* | Dosing |
Sensor Mode | Check
weighing
* Factory setting
Weighing mode settings
Note
The number of available settings depends on the type of balance.
Values Explanation
Universal For all standard weighing applications.
Dosing For dosing liquid or powdery products. With this setting, the balance responds very
quickly to the smallest changes in weight.
Sensor Mode Depending on the setting of the ambient conditions, this setting delivers a filtered
weighing signal of varying strength. The filter has a linear characteristic in relation to
time (not adaptive) and is suitable for continuous measured value processing.
Checkweighing With this setting, the balance only reacts to significant changes in weight and the
result is very stable.
6.2.2 Ambient conditions
Navigation: [ ] > [Wghparam] > Environment
With this setting, the balance can be optimally adapted to the ambient conditions at locations.
Environment Defines the ambient conditions Very stable | Stable |
Standard* | Unstable |
Very unstable
* Factory setting
Settings for ambient conditions
Note
The number of available settings depends on the type of balance.
Values Explanation
Very stable For working in an environment that is free from drafts and vibrations.
Stable For working in an environment that is virtually free from drafts and vibrations.
Standard This setting corresponds to an average working environment subject to significant
fluctuations of the ambient conditions.
Unstable For an environment subject to constantly changing conditions.
Very unstable For an environment with changing conditions.
6.2.3 Measured value release

Navigation: [ ] > [Wghparam] > Value Release
This setting can be used to define how quickly a measured value is recognized as stable by the balance and
released.
Value Release Defines measured value release. Very fast | Fast |
Reliable+Fast* | Reli
able | Very reliable
* Factory setting
Measured value settings
Values Explanation
Very fast For very fast results where repeatability is of less importance.
Fast For fast results where repeatability is of less importance.
Reliable+Fast This setting corresponds to an average stabilization time and repeatability.
Reliable For good repeatability of measured results, the stabilization time is longer.
Very reliable For very good repeatability of measured results, the stabilization is longer.
6.2.4 AutoZero
Navigation: [ ] > [Wghparam] > AutoZero
This menu item can be used to switch the automatic zero correction on or off.
Note
This menu item is not available for approved balances (e = d).
AutoZero Defines the ambient conditions Off | On*
* Factory setting
Settings for automatic zero correction
Values Explanation
Off The automatic zero correction is switched off.
On The automatic zero correction [AutoZero] continuously corrects zero deviations, e.g.
that can occur due to slight fouling of the weighing pan.
6.3 User
Navigation: [ ] > [User]
This menu can be used to define the user name, dialog language and user access codes.
1 Tap [User] and subsequently the associated button.
2 The settings can be changed by tapping the associated button or confirming with [OK].
User Name The name of the current user profile can be changed See
here.
Language Defines the dialog language. See
User ID Change the user ID. See User ID and password
Password Change the user password. (page 87)
6.3.1 User name
Navigation: [ ] > [User] > User Name
The name of the current user profile can be changed in this menu item. Alphanumeric characters can be entered
in the input window.
Note
If the entered user name already exists, an error message is displayed. After changing the name, the user pro
file appears at the top left of the display and in the profile menu [ ] under the new name. The user name is
also printed in the protocols.
1 Under User Name, tap the associated button.
An alphanumeric input window is displayed.
2 Enter the designation and confirm with [OK].
User Name Changes the name of the current user profile (max. 20 charac Any
ters). e.g. (User 1)*
* Factory setting
6.3.2 Language
Navigation: [ ] > [User] > Language
This menu item can be used to select the dialog language. The language is changed immediately. All windows
and messages are displayed in the selected language.
Exception: interface parameters in the system settings are always in English.
Note
If the dialog language is changed, it is possible that administrator and user access codes (password and ID)
cannot be entered. The ID and password must therefore always be entered in the defined language!
1 Tap Language on the associated button.
A selection window is displayed.
2 Tap the preferred language.
Language Defines the preferred language. English | Deutsch |
Note Français | Español |
The language is normally preset for the country of use. Italiano | Russian |
Katakana | Polski |
Cestina | Magyar | Chi
nese | Japanese
6.3.3 User ID and password
Navigation: [ ] > [User] > User ID or Password
The current user access codes can be changed in these two menu items with identical dialogs. These codes are
required for accessing menu areas that have been protected at user level by the administrator
If an existing ID or password is deleted and no new code is entered, an error message is displayed.
Note
If access to both of these menu items is protected by the administrator, the current ID and password must be
entered before the code can be changed.
1 Under User ID or Password tap the associated button.
User ID Changes the existing current user profile ID (max. 20 charac Any
ters). (Home = 0 | User
1 = 1 | User 2 = 2
|User 3 = 3 | User
4 = 4 | User 5 = 5 |
User 6 = 6 | User
7 = 7)*
Password Changes the existing current user profile password (max. 20 Any
characters). (Home = 0 | User
1 = 1 | User 2 = 2
|User 3 = 3 | User
4 = 4 | User 5 = 5 |
User 6 = 6 | User
7 = 7)*
* Factory setting
6.4 Doors
Navigation: [ ] > [Door]
This menu can be used to adapt the function of the glass draft shield doors to suit specific requirements.
1 Tap [Door].
Door window is displayed.
2 Select the required menu item (e.g. Door Function).
3 Change the setting.
Menu structure
Door Function Manual See Section Door function
Automatic
Doorway 100 % See Section Door opening
75 %
75 %
25 %
Door Function
The operation of the door function can be defined with this setting.
Door Function Activates/deactivates the draft shield door function. Manual* | Automatic
* Factory setting
Door function settings
Values Explanation
Manual The draft shield (doors) must be opened or closed manually.
With the [ ] keys, via SmartSens or manually.
Automatic Opens and closes the glass draft shield doors automatically when required.
Note
Information on configuration of SmartSens, see Settings for SmartSens and ErgoSens (page 112).
The door function [Automatic] is not compatible with [Detection mode] [Automatic] the electrostatic detec
tion, see Settings for electrostatic detection (page 113). If both [Automatic] options are selected, the electro
static detection has priority, i.e. the doors are not automatically operated.
Example
● When the [H] button is pressed, the doors open automatically for loading the tare weight.
● When a request is made to load the adjustment weight while adjusting the balance, the doors open auto
matically. The doors close automatically when the weight is loaded.
● The glass draft shield closes automatically for all weighings to achieve a stable weight indication.
● For different operations (e.g. piece counting), the doors open and close automatically as required by the
application.
Doorway
If the application permits, the door opening angle can be reduced. This shortens opening and closing times,
reducing environmental influences (e.g. drafts).
Doorway Defines the extent to which the glass draft shield doors can be 100 %* | 75 % | 50 %
opened (automatically or manually). | 25 %
Door opening settings
Values Explanation
100 % Opens the door fully.
75 % Opens the doors three quarters.
50 % Opens the doors halfway.
25 % Opens the doors a quarter.
6.5 Terminal
Navigation: [ ] > [Terminal]
This menu can be used to adapt the terminal to suit specific requirements and the display adjusted.
1 Tap [Terminal].
Terminal window is displayed.
2 Select the required menu item, e.g. Brightness and subsequently tap the associated button.
Brightness window is displayed.
3 Tap the plus or minus arrow key and confirm with [OK].
Brightness Adjusts the display brightness. See Brightness (page 89)
Colour selection Selects the display color. See Color selection (page 89)
Sound Set the beep volume. See Beep (page 90)
Touch Function Activates/deactivates the display touch function See Touch function (page 90)
Touchadjust Activates/deactivates the touch screen adjustment. See Touch adjustment (page 90)
Optical key Activates/deactivates the visual feedback. See Optical key feedback (page 90)
feedback
Speedread Activates/deactivates the weighing result display See Speedread (page 91)
color selection.
StatusLight Activates/deactivates the status indicator. Defines See Status indicator (page 91)
the brightness.
6.5.1 Brightness
Navigation: [ ] > [Terminal] > Brightness
This menu item can be used to adjust the display brightness. The brightness is adjusted in 20% steps each
time one of the two arrow keys is tapped.
Brightness Adjusts the display brightness (in 20% steps). 20 % … 100 %
(80 %)*
* Factory setting
6.5.2 Color selection
Navigation: [ ] > [Terminal] > Colour selection
This menu item can be used to adjust the display color. The colors can be used for orientation. Different colors
can be used for user profiles for easy identification of a currently active profile. There are a total of 8 different
colors. 4 different colors with low (left column) or high (right column) contrast.
Note
The high contrast colors make the display easier to read in poor lighting conditions.
Colour selection Color adjustment. Color 1* | Color 2 | Col
or 3 | Color 4 | Color 5 |
Color 6 | Color 7 | Color
8
(color 1, blue with low
contrast)*
* Factory setting
6.5.3 Beep
Navigation: [ ] > [Terminal] > Sound
This menu item can be used to adjust the beep volume. The volume is increased in 10% steps each time one
of the two arrow keys is tapped. Setting the volume to 0% switches off the beep.
Sound Adjusts the volume (in 10% steps) 0 % … 100 %
(70 %)*
* Factory setting
6.5.4 Touch function
Navigation: [ ] > [Terminal] > Touch Function
This menu item can be used to activate or deactivate the touch screen touch function. If the [Touch Function] is
deactivated, the display will no longer respond to touch in weighing mode. Settings can no longer be made by
tapping the display (exception: function keys).
Important
The touch function is always active in setting mode to allow settings to be made.
Touch Function Activates/deactivates the touch screen touch function. On* | Off
* Factory setting
6.5.5 Touch adjustment
Navigation: [ ] > [Terminal] > Touchadjust
If the instrument does not respond correctly when a certain area of the display is tapped, the touch screen can
be adjusted with [Touchadjust].
1 Tap [Activate].
A window is displayed.
2 Tap the flashing area. This procedure must be repeated several times.
3 The procedure can be interrupted at any time by tapping [C].
When all flashing areas have been selected, the window closes.
6.5.6 Optical key feedback

Navigation: [ ] > [Terminal] > Optical key feedback
A short beep is generated each time a button is pressed or a menu function initiated as confirmation.
For additional visual feedback, the [Optical key feedback] function can be activated. When the beep sounds,
the yellow LEDs on the right and left at the bottom of the status bar also light up briefly on the terminal.
Optical key Activates/deactivates the visual feedback. Off* | On
feedback
* Factory setting
6.5.7 Speedread
Navigation: [ ] > [Terminal] > Speedread
If this function is activated, the weighing result is displayed in a light color as long as it remains unstable. The
result is displayed in a darker color when it is stable. If the [Speedread] function is deactivated, the weighing
result is always displayed in the same color, irrespective of whether it is stable or not.
Speedread Activates/deactivates the color display of the weighing result. Off* | On
* Factory setting
6.5.8 Status indicator
Navigation: [ ] > [Terminal] > StatusLight
New intelligent safety tools monitor the balance ready status. This menu item can be used to activate or deacti
vate the status indicator. The built-in status indicator in the terminal shows that the balance is ready to use.
Brightness Adjusts the display brightness (in 10% steps). 10 % … 100 %
(60 %)*
Green status Activates/deactivates the green status icon. If the green status Off | On*
icon is deactivated, the status indicator does not light up when
the balance is ready to use.
The other status icons (flashing green, yellow, red) are displayed
as normal.
StatusLight Activates/deactivates the status indicator. Off | On*
Green = balance is ready to use.
Flashing green = balance is busy. Example: Internal adjustment
in progress.
Yellow = task pending, balance can still be used. Example: Auto
matic internal adjustment pending.
Red = balance cannot/must not be used. Example: Balance is
not correctly leveled.
* Factory setting
6.6 User factory settings

Navigation: [ ] > [User Reset]
This menu can be used to reset all settings for an active user profile to the factory settings.
CAUTION

Data loss after user profile reset

After a reset, the balance is reset to the factory settings. All user and application-specific set
tings for the active user profile are reset to the factory settings. All individual settings, includ
ing user ID and password as well as measured values are deleted!

1 Tap [User Reset].
User Reset window is displayed.
The balance restarts with the factory settings.
7 Weighing Application
Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing]
This section provides information and descriptions of setting options for practical use of the appli
cation.
All application settings are saved under the active user profile. Each user can select specific settings for this
application. It must be ensured that the required user profile is selected.
Selecting the application
1 Press [ ].
2 Tap the [Weighing] icon in the selection window.
The selected application is active.
The balance is ready for weighing.
7.1 Weighing application settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ]
The procedure for performing a simple weighing has already been described, see Weighing for the first time
(page 30). In addition to the described procedures (zeroing, taring and performing a simple weighing), the
balance offers a number of options for adjusting the application to suit specific requirements.
1 Press [ ].
A window with application-dependent settings is displayed.
2 Select the required menu item (e.g. Function Keys).
4 To exit the menu without saving, tap [C].
Note
Settings can be printed out at any time in the application-dependent settings menu.
Example: Printout
Weighing
Function Keys
ID -
Nominal -
+Tol -
-Tol -
Lotcounter -
Adjust.int 1
Adjust.ext -
Test int -
Test ext -
PreTare -
Tare Store -
Weighing Application 93
Function Keys Definition of function keys to appear at the bottom See Selecting function keys
of the display. (page 95)
These keys enable direct access to specific func
tions.
SmartTrac Definition of the appearance of the graphic See Selecting SmartTrac (page 97)
weighing-in aid.
Info Field Definition of information fields to be displayed. See Selecting information fields
(page 97)
AutoPrint Activates/deactivates automatic weighing result See Specifications for automatic pro
printout. tocol printout (page 98)
Display Unit Definition of unit for result display. See Selecting weighing units
(page 99)
Info Unit Definition of an additional weighing unit. This See Selecting weighing units
appears in the respective display information field. (page 99)
Custom Unit 1 Definition of a specific weighing unit. See Defining free weighing units
(page 99)
Custom Unit 2 Definition of a second specific weighing unit. See Defining free weighing units
(page 99)
Protocol Selects data to be shown in the weighing protocols. See Protocol definition (page 100)
Print key Definition of the behavior of the [ ] key for manual See Specifications for manual proto
weighing result printout. col printout (page 104)
Transfer Key Formats data output via the [Transfer] function key. See Output data formatting (transfer
key) (page 104)
Identification Defines identifications. See Definition of identifications and
protocol headers (page 107)
Barcode Defines how barcode data is processed. see Instructions for processing bar
These settings are only relevant if a barcode scan code data (page 108)
ner is connected.
RFID Defines how RFID data is processed. see Instructions for processing RFID
These settings are only relevant if a RFID reader is data (page 109)
connected.
MinWeigh Activates/deactivates the minimum weight function. See MinWeigh function settings
The minimum weight function ensures that the (page 109)
weighing results are within defined tolerances
appropriate to the requirements of your quality
assurance system.
Tare Store Predefines up to 10 selectable tare weights. See Tare memory definition and acti
vation (page 110)
AutoTare Activates/deactivates the tare function. See Automatic taring function set
The automatic tare function automatically stores the tings (page 111)
first stable weight as the tare weight.
Smart & Programs both terminal SmartSens sensors. Up to See Settings for SmartSens and
ErgoSens two external ErgoSens (optional) can be assigned a ErgoSens (page 112)
function in this menu.
AntiStatic Kit Settings for the optional anti-static kit (ionizer) for See Settings for the optional anti-sta
eliminating the build-up of electrostatic charges on tic kit (ionizer) (page 113)
weighing objects.
ES-Detection Settings for electrostatic detection See Settings for electrostatic detec
tion (page 113)
7.1.1 Selecting function keys
Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > Function Keys
Function keys enable direct access to specific functions and settings in the application. A function can be acti
vated by tapping a key.
The numbered function keys are displayed in the application at the bottom of the display. The numbers define
the sequence in the display.
● Activate or deactivate function keys by tapping. The sequence of the keys is automatically updated.
● To redefine the sequence, all function keys must be deactivated and subsequently activated in the required
sequence.
Application is activated.
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Function Keys, tap the [Define] button.
3 Select a function key by tapping.
The function key is automatically numbered.
7.1.1.1 Function key overview

ID This function key can be used for the assignment of individual
weighing identifications (descriptive texts), which are also shown
in the protocols.
After tapping this function key, a window is displayed in which
the ID can be selected and text entered.
Information for the definition of identifications, see Definition of
identifications and protocol headers (page 107).
Information on practical working with identifications, see Work
ing with identifications (page 116).
Nominal Definition of the required nominal weight.
This also serves as a reference for the tolerances.
Information on nominal weight settings, see Weighing-in to a
nominal weight (page 117).
+Tol Definition of accuracy (tolerances) for weighing-in to a nominal
weight.
Information on tolerance settings, see Weighing-in to a nominal
weight (page 117).
-Tol Definition of accuracy (tolerances) for weighing-in to a nominal
weight.
Information on tolerance settings, see Weighing-in to a nominal
weight (page 117).
Lot counter Activates the lot counter and defines a start value.
Information on settings, see Working with the lot counter
(page 116).
Adjust.int Balance adjustment with internal adjustment weight.
Information on making and recording adjustments, see Adjust
ment with internal weight/ProFACT (page 120).
Adjust.ext Balance adjustment with an external adjustment weight.
Information on making and recording adjustments, see Adjust
ment with external test weight (page 120).
Note
External adjustment is not available on certain legal-for-trade bal
ances.
Test int Balance adjustment test with an internal test weight.
Information on performing and recording tests, see Testing the
adjustment with internal weight (page 121).
Test ext Testing balance adjustment with an external test weight.
Information on performing and recording tests, see Testing the
adjustment with external test weight (page 122).
PreTare Numerical entry of a fixed tare weight (subtraction of tare
weight).
Information on tare weight entry, see Taring options (page 115).
Tare Store Displaying a predefined tare weight.
Information on the definition of predefined tare weights, see Tare
memory definition and activation (page 110).
Information on practical working with the tare memory, see Tar
ing options (page 115).
1/2d … 1/1000d Changes the resolution of the weighing result.
Information on resolution adjustment, see Changing the weighing
result resolution (page 114).
Note
For calibration reasons, resolution selection is not available on
certain legal-for-trade balances.
Header Prints the protocol header.
Information on weighing protocol settings, see Protocol definition
(page 100).
Footer Prints the protocol footer.
Information on weighing protocol settings, see Protocol definition
(page 100).
Adj. History Displays the adjustment history.
Note
Adjustments made in the system settings are displayed.
Information on settings, see Settings for adjustments and tests
(page 43).
Transfer Transfers the current weight, without further data (additional infor
mation) directly to a connected host computer. The output data
can be formatted.
Information on output data formatting, see Output data formatting
(transfer key) (page 104).
Test Sequence Displays a list of tasks set to [Manual].
Information on adjustments, see Assigning a test sequence to a
task. (page 63).
Info This function key is used as a shortcut for the [Show] key.
Information on adjustments, see Balance information (page 72).
GWP History Opens the history. All test results saved in the GWP history are
displayed.
Information on history settings, see Test history (page 70).
Ionizer Starts/stops the connected ionizer, see Settings for electrostatic
detection (page 113).
ES-Det. Manually starts the measurement of samples for electrostatic
charges, see Settings for electrostatic detection (page 113).
Detection threshold This function key is used as a shortcut for entering the switching
threshold, see Settings for electrostatic detection (page 113).
Factory setting: [Adjust.int] and [1/10d] activated.
7.1.2 Selecting SmartTrac
Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > SmartTrac
SmartTrac is a graphic remaining range display. It displays the already used and remaining weighing range. In
certain applications, SmartTrac also facilitates weighing-in to a specific nominal weight.
SmartTrac is displayed below the weighing result on the right of the display, see Display (page 18).
1 Press [ ].
Window with application-dependent settings is displayed.
2 Tap the corresponding button.
Note
This menu can also be displayed directly from the application by tapping SmartTrac.
SmartTrac Activates/deactivates SmartTrac or defines the display mode. No SmartTrac | *|
|
* Factory setting
7.1.3 Selecting information fields

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > Info Field
The information fields in the display provide constant information on, e.g. set values, measured results.
The numbered fields are displayed in the application. The numbers define the information field sequence in the
display (maximum 4 information fields).
● Information fields can be activated or deactivated by tapping. The sequence of the keys is automatically
updated.
● To redefine the sequence, all information fields must be deactivated and then activated in the required
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Info Field, tap the [Define] button.
3 Select Info Field by tapping.
The information field is automatically numbered.
Values Explanation
Nominal This function key displays the nominal weight.
+Tol This function key displays the entered tolerance for weighing-in to nominal weight.
-Tol This function key displays the entered tolerance for weighing-in to nominal weight.
Lot counter Displays the item counter status.
ID1 Displays the identification entered via the [ID] function key.
Note
Instead of ID1, the defined designation is displayed, see Definition of identifications
and protocol headers (page 107).
Note
Note
Note
Info Unit Displays the weighing result in the second selected weighing unit, see Selecting
weighing units (page 99).
Tare Displays the current tare value (in the same unit of weight as the weighing result in
the main display).
Gross Displays the current gross weight (in the same unit of weight as the weighing result
in the main display).
RefTare If the [MinWeigh] function is activated, this information field displays the upper ref
erence tare limit.
Information on minimum weight settings, see MinWeigh function settings
(page 109).
MinWeigh If the [MinWeigh] function is activated, this information field displays the required
minimum weight based on the reference tare.
(page 109).
MW-Method If the [MinWeigh] function is activated, this information field displays which of the
three MW methods are used for the QA standard.
(page 109).
7.1.4 Specifications for automatic protocol printout

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > AutoPrint
This menu item can be used to define whether and under which conditions the balance automatically records
the weighing result. Information defined for recording single values is printed.
See Protocol definition (page 100).
When this function is activated [On], the criteria for automatic entry can be defined via the [Define] button.
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Autom. WeightEntry, tap the associated button.
Autom. WeightEntry window is displayed.
Limit For automatic protocol printout, the defined limits must not be any
reached and subsequently exceeded.
Delay time When the limits are exceeded, the [Delay time] starts, after lapse any
of which the weight is recorded. (displayed in seconds)
With this setting, the weighing result can be printed with a
defined delay if necessary.
Factory setting: [Off] Automatic entry disabled.
7.1.5 Selecting weighing units

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > Display Unit or Info Unit
The menu items Display Unit and Info Unit can be used to define the weighing units to be used. The weighing
result can simultaneously be displayed in two different weighing units by selecting different units. The same
units are available for selection under both menu items.
After changing the Display Unit, the current weighing result as well as the values in the information fields Tare
and Gross are displayed in the new weighing unit. The Info Unit is used for the information field with the same
name.
See Selecting information fields (page 97).
Note
● The number of available units is model-dependent.
● All available units are either displayed together or shown as a rolling list.
1 Press [ ].
A window with application-dependent settings opens.
2 Under Display Unit or Info Unit tap the associated button.
Display Unit Defines the unit (model-dependent). g | kg | ct | lb | oz | ozt |
GN | dwt | mom | msg |
tlh | tls | tlt | tola | baht
Info Unit Defines the unit (model-dependent). g | kg | ct | lb | oz | ozt |
GN | dwt | mom | msg |
tlh | tls | tlt | tola | baht
Factory setting: Model-dependent, for both units.
7.1.6 Defining free weighing units

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > Custom Unit 1 or Custom Unit 2
A specific weighing unit can be defined under the menu items Custom Unit 1 and Custom Unit 2. This allows
calculations (e.g. surfaces or volumes) to be carried out directly during determination of the weighing result.
The free weighing units are available in all menus and input fields in which weighing units can be selected
(however, not for the entry of manual tare weights).
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Custom Unit 1 or Custom Unit 2 tap the [Off] button.
Custom Unit 1 or Custom Unit 2 window is displayed.
Formula Defines how subsequently defined value for [Factor] is calculat F * Net | F / Net
ed. There are 2 formulae available, where F stands for the factor
and net for the weight.
F * Net = multiplies the net weight by the factor.
F / Net = factor is divided by the net weight.
The formula can be used, for example, to simultaneously take
into account a known error factor while weighing.
Factor Definition with which factor (-107 … 107) the effective weighing Any
result (net weight) is calculated (via the previously selected for
mula).
Name Define a designation for the free weighing unit (max. 4 charac Any
ters).
Note
The entry of weighing units (e.g. [g], [kg]) is not permitted and
results in the generation of an error message.
Result Output Defines the formatting for the weighing result. Any
Format Example
A setting of “0.05” defines 2 places after the decimal point with
rounding to 5. A determined result of 123.4777 is consequently
displayed as 123.50.
Note
This function can only be used to reduce the resolution of the
weighing result. No value must therefore be entered that exceeds
the maximum balance resolution! Values that are too small are
automatically rounded off.
Factory setting: [Off].
7.1.7 Protocol definition
Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > Protocol
This menu item can be used to define information to appear in the protocols. This extensive menu is divided
into 3 submenus in which options for the header, recording of single values and the footer can be defined.
The numbered data items are printed in the protocols. The numbers determine the sequence in the printout.
● Information can be activated or deactivated by tapping. The sequence of the keys is automatically updated.
● To redefine the sequence, all information must be deactivated and subsequently activated in the required
sequence.
1 Press [ ].

Protocol window is displayed.
3 Under (e.g. Header), tap the [Define] button.
4 Select an information key by tapping.
The information key is automatically numbered.
Note
The results and data can be printed out at any time.
Example: Printout
Header / Footer Single value
------- Weighing ------- ------- Weighing -------

25.Jul 2013 17:30 25.Jul 2013 17:05
T1 N 121.53 g
T2 T 41.37 g
User Name User 1 G 162.90 g
Balance Type XPE204 ------------------------
Balance ID Lab A/1
ID1
Balance is levelled
Nominal 0.00 g
+Tol 2.50 %
-Tol 2.50 %
MW-Method Off
Min.Weight by Tare
------------------------
Signature
........................

Header Define the information to be printed in the protocol See Protocol header
header (before the results).
Single value Define the information to be recorded for each sin See Recording single values
gle result.
Footer Define information to be printed in the protocol foot See Protocol footer
er after the results (single values).
Header line of protocols
This submenu can be used to define information to be printed in the protocol header (before the results). The
header is automatically printed if it has been defined as part of the protocol.
However, the header can also be printed separately by tapping the [Header] function key.
Values Explanation
Appl. Name The application name is printed.

Title 1 The defined protocol header is printed, see Definition of identifications and protocol
headers (page 107).
headers (page 107).
Date/Time The current date and time are printed.
User The name of the current user is printed.
Balance Type The balance type is printed.
The balance type is generated by the balance and cannot be changed by the user.
SNR The serial numbers of the balance and terminal are printed.
The serial numbers of the balance and terminal are generated by the balance and
cannot be changed.
Balance ID The balance identification defined in the system settings is printed.
Levelcontrol Records whether or not the balance is correctly leveled.
ID1 The identification defined via the function key is printed.
Information on practical working with identifications, see Working with identifica
tions (page 116).
tions (page 116).
tions (page 116).
tions (page 116).
Nom.,+Tol,-Tol Recorded the defined nominal weight and the defined plus and minus tolerances.
MW-Method Records the selected method for the minimum weight.
(page 109).
Signature Inserts a line block for signing the protocol.
Blank Line A blank line is printed.
Dash Line Inserts a dashed dividing line (this option is available twice).
3 Blank Lines Prints 3 space lines at the end of the protocol (paper feed).
Factory setting: Appl. Name and Date/Time enabled in this order.
Recording of single values
This submenu can be used to define the information to be recorded for each individual result.
Printing takes place by pressing the [ ] key or automatically if the automatic print function is activated.
See Specifications for automatic protocol printout (page 98).
Values Explanation
Levelcontrol Records whether or not the balance is correctly leveled.
tions (page 116).

tions (page 116).
tions (page 116).
tions (page 116).
(page 109).
Tare The tare weight of the current weighing is printed.
Net The net weight of the current weighing is printed.
Gross The gross weight of the current weighing is printed.
Info Unit The weighing result (net weight) is additionally printed in the selected information
unit.
ES-Detection The electrostatic detection status is printed.
Footer The defined information for the footer is printed.
Factory setting: Net enabled.
Protocol footer
This submenu can be used to define the information to be printed in the protocol footer after the results (single
values).
The footer can be printed by tapping the [Footer] function key.
The footer options are identical with those of the header, only the Levelcontrol option is not available.
Values Explanation
headers (page 107).
headers (page 107).
Date/Time The current date and time are printed.
User The name of the current user is printed.
cannot be changed.
Balance ID The balance identification defined in the system settings is printed.

tions (page 116).
tions (page 116).
tions (page 116).
tions (page 116).
(page 109).
Factory setting: Signature activated.
7.1.8 Specifications for manual protocol printout

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > Print key
This menu item can be used to define the behavior of the [ ] key (protocol printout).
1 Press [ ].
2 Tap Print key on the associated button.
Values Explanation
Stable The protocol is only printed if the weighing result is stable.
Dynamic The protocol is printed immediately, regardless of whether the weighing result is sta
ble.
Off No protocol is printed, the key is inactive.
Factory setting: Stable.
7.1.9 Output data formatting (transfer key)

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > Transfer Key
A stable weight can be transferred via the interface to a host computer with the [Transfer] function key. This
menu item can be used to define the formatting for output values. This can be necessary if the balance is oper
ated together with other instruments, programs or peripheral devices that use a specific data format. It can be
defined whether data is output to the host or also to the printer.

1 Press [ ].
2 Under Transfer Key, tap the [Define] button.
Transfer Key window is displayed.
Menu structure
Data output format Standard See Output format (page 105)
Customise
Data transfer to printer Off See Data output to the printer
On (page 106)
7.1.9.1 Output format
Data output is set by default to a standard format that generally corresponds to the weight displayed at the ter
minal, followed by an end-of-line character defined for the host. Negative weights are displayed with a minus
sign. The output weight is left-justified.
Example (–12.8934 g):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
- 1 2 . 8 9 3 4 g CF LF
Note
● If the resolution of the displayed value is reduced, the weight is also transferred with reduced resolution to
the host.
● If the balance has overload or underload at the time of data transfer, UNDERLOAD or OVERLOAD is trans
ferred instead of the weight.
1 The output format can be changed by tapping the associated button under Data output format.
2 Activate [Customise] and subsequently tap the [Define] button.
Menu structure
Net indicator field Off See Section Net weight icon
Field length
Weight field Field length See Section Weight format
No. of decimal digits
Sign
Sign position
Unit field Off See Section Weight unit field
Field length
Net weight icon
In the standard output format, net weights are not specially marked. To place an N in front of net weights, this
function can be activated and also the field length defined. The net symbol is left-justified in the field.
Off Net weight icon deactivated. None
*

Field length Activates the net weight icon. Defines the field length (max. 1 … 10
10 characters). (5 characters)*
Note
If the balance was not tared, the net symbol is not transferred.
Blank characters are transferred appropriate to the selected field
length.
* Factory setting
Weight format
Field length Defines the total length of the weight data field including sign, 1 … 20
decimal point and decimal places (max. 20 characters). (10)*
Note
Irrespective of their setting, as many places are output as neces
sary for complete transfer of the weight displayed at the terminal.
The weight is output right-justified.
No. of decimal Defines the number of decimal places. 0…6
digits If the set value has less than the number of decimal places dis (max. number of places
played at the terminal, a rounded value with the selected number of the balance)*
of decimal places is transferred.
Sign Defines the sign. Always | Neg. values*
Always = each weight is preceded by a plus or minus sign.
Neg. values = only negative values are preceded by a minus
sign. Positive values are transferred without sign.
Sign position Defines whether the sign should directly precede the weight -xxx.yy* | - xxx.yy
(right-justified) or left-justified.
* Factory setting
Weight unit field
In the standard output format, each weight is output with the weight unit (appropriate to the current display
unit). This menu can be used to select whether weights are transferred with or without unit and also define the
field length for the weight unit.
Off Defines whether weights are transferred with or without unit. None
(Output of weight unit
activated)*
Field length Defines the field length (max. 5 characters). 1…5
Irrespective of their setting for the field length, as many places are (3)*
output as necessary for complete transfer of the weight displayed
at the terminal. The weight unit is output left-justified (separated
from the weight by a space).
* Factory setting
7.1.9.2 Data output to the printer

When the [Transfer] function key is pressed, the data is normally only transferred to the host. Data can also be
sent to the printer by activating the setting.

Note
The previously described data formatting settings have no influence on data output to the printer. This is deter
mined only by the protocol settings.
See Protocol definition (page 100).
Values Explanation
Off Data output to the printer deactivated.
On Activates data output to the printer.
7.1.10 Definition of identifications and protocol headers

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > Identification
This menu item can be used to activate the 4 identifications or change their designations available under the
[ID] function key. Define two headers for the weighing protocols. The entered designations appear in the
respective information fields (e.g. company name, customer) and can be printed out in the weighing protocols
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Identification, tap the [Define] button.
Identification window is displayed.
Menu structure
Title 1 T1 See Section Protocol header
Title 2 T2
ID1 Name ID1 See Section Identifications
ID2 Name ID2
ID3 Name ID3
ID4 Name ID4
Protocol header
Values Explanation
T1 Defines a designation for the protocol header (max. 20 characters).
T2 Defines a designation for the protocol header (max. 20 characters).
Factory setting: [T1] and [T2].
Identifications
Default ID designations are [ID1], [ID2], [ID3] and [ID4]. These can be replaced with specific designations
(e.g. customer, order). The ID is subsequently available with the new designation under the [ID] function key.
Information on working with identifications, see Working with identifications (page 116).

ID1 Activates/deactivates the ID1. Defines the designation (max 20 Off | On*
characters). (ID1)*
ID2 Activates/deactivates the ID2. Defines the designation (max 20 Off* | On
characters).
characters).
characters).
* Factory setting
7.1.11 Instructions for processing barcode data

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > Barcode
If a barcode reader or keyboard is connected to the balance, this menu can be used to define how the data is to
be processed.
The external device is appropriately configured in the [Peripherals] system setting.
1 Press [ ].
2 Tap Barcode on the associated button.
Values Explanation
Off No data is processed. This setting must be used if no external device is connected.
ID1 The received barcode data is treated as identification texts and the corresponding
identification assigned.
Note
The defined designation is displayed instead of [ID1].
Note
Note
Note
PreTare The barcode data is interpreted as a value for the subtraction of tare weight, see Tar
ing options (page 115).
Host The data is transferred directly to a connected PC.
If no PC is connected or this data cannot be received, it is ignored.

Open Input The data is written in the currently open input window (e.g. lot counter, ID or
PreTare).
The window is automatically closed after the data is processed. If no input window
is open, the data is ignored.
Factory setting: [Open Input].
7.1.12 Instructions for processing RFID data

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > RFID
If a RFID reader is connected to the balance, this menu item can be used to define how the data is to be
processed.
The external device is appropriately configured in the [Peripherals] system setting.
1 Press [ ].
2 Tap RFID on the associated button.
Values Explanation
Off No data is processed. This setting must be used if no external device is connected.
Host The data is transferred directly to a connected PC.
If no PC is connected or this data cannot be received, it is ignored.
Open Input The data is written in the currently open input window (e.g. lot counter, ID or
PreTare).
The window is automatically closed after the data is processed. If no input window
is open, the data is ignored.
Factory setting: [Open Input].
7.1.13 MinWeigh function settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > MinWeigh
Attention
The menu with the settings for the MinWeigh function is deactivated by default and not accessible. The
MinWeigh function must be activated and programmed by a service engineer. If this function is required, but is
not accessible in the menu, please contact your METTLER TOLEDO representative.
MinWeigh
The MinWeigh function ensures that the weighing results are within defined tolerances appropriate to the
requirements of your quality assurance system.
The service engineer will determine the required minimum weights based on your QA requirements and subse
quently load these values into the balance. Up to 3 tare weights can be defined with the corresponding mini
mum weights. The service engineer will set the weighing parameters to the values required for the maintenance
of tolerances.
See Weighing parameters (page 83).
Note
After programming the balance, the service engineer will issue a certificate. This records the measurements and
tolerances as well as corresponding tare and minimum weights for weighing. These settings cannot be
changed by the user as long as the MinWeigh function is activated.

The MinWeigh function is activated.
1 Press [ ].
2 Under MinWeigh, tap the associated button.
MinWeigh window is displayed.
Method Selects the method programmed by the service engineer accord Any
ing to your instructions.
Up to 3 methods can be defined, e.g. [USP].
Info Displays information relating to the MinWeigh function (method, Show
date of next test by the service engineer and required minimum
weights based on reference tare weights defined by the service
engineer).
The information can be printed out by pressing the [ ] key.
7.1.14 Tare memory definition and activation

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > Tare Store
This menu item can be used to define up to 10 tare weights available under the [Tare Store] function key and
change their designations. The default designations for the tare memory are [T1] … [T10]. These can be
replaced by specific names, e.g. designation of a tare container. The tare memory is subsequently available
with the new designation under the function key.
Information on working with the tare memory, see Taring options (page 115).
Note
Deactivated tare memories [Off] cannot be selected under the [Tare Store] function key.
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Tare Store, tap the [Define] button.
Tare Store window is displayed.
3 The settings, e.g. T1 can be changed by tapping the associated button.
Menu structure
T1 … T10 Off See Parameter table
On

Off Deactivated tare memory. None
On Activates the tare memory. Defines a designation. Defines the Name | Value
weight.
Name Defines a designation for the tare memory (max. 20 characters). any
Note
Although the designation can consist of up to 20 characters, it is
recommended to use short designations. A maximum of 10
characters can be displayed under the [Tare Store] function key.
Value Defines a weight. any
Note
Instead of entering the value, the respective tare container can be
placed on the weighing pan and the button with the balance icon
subsequently pressed. The weight is directly taken over.
7.1.15 Automatic taring function settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > AutoTare
This menu item can be used to define whether and under which conditions the balance automatically interprets
the first applied weight after zeroing as the tare weight. If the AutoTare function is activated, [On], the weight
criterion for the automatic taring function can be defined via the button.
Information on working with the automatic taring function, see Taring options (page 115).
1 Press [ ].
2 Under AutoTare, tap the associated button.
AutoTare window is displayed.
4 Enter the value and confirm with [OK].
Off Deactivated AutoTare function. None
On Activates the automatic taring function. Limit
Limit This value defines the minimum weight that must be applied to Any
the weighing pan so that it is automatically stored as the tare
weight. If the weight is below the limits, it is not automatically
transferred to the tare memory.
Note
Instead of entering the weight, the lightest tare container can be
placed on the weighing pan and the button with the balance icon
subsequently pressed. The applied weight is directly taken over
as a limit.

7.1.16 Settings for SmartSens and ErgoSens

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > Smart & ErgoSens
This menu can be used to activate or deactivate both hands-free sensors (SmartSens) in the left and right top
corner of the terminal.
External sensors connected to the connections "Aux 1" and "Aux 2" at the rear of the balance can be configured
with the ErgoSens settings. ErgoSens is an optionally available external sensor. A maximum of 2 external
ErgoSens can be connected to the balance.
Each of the two SmartSens and ErgoSens can be assigned one of the following functions by tapping the associ
ated button.
Note
If one of the functions that emulate a button at the terminal is activated, the respective symbol ( , ->0<-, -
>T<- or ) in the status bar below the respective sensor lights up. For all other settings that emulate function
keys with the same name, the green F (Function) symbol lights up. No symbol lights up when the sensor is
deactivated.
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Smart & ErgoSens, tap the [Define] button.
3 Select the required menu item, e.g. SmartSens left.
4 Select the function by tapping the button.
Menu structure
SmartSens left Off | Door | ->0<- | ->T<- | Print | See Parameter table
ID1 | ID2 | ID3 | ID4 | Header | Foot
er | PreTare | 1/2d | 1/5d | 1/10d |
1/100d | 1/1000d | Transfer
SmartSens right Off | Door | ->0<- | ->T<- | Print | See Parameter table
er | PreTare | 1/2d | 1/5d | 1/10d |
1/100d | 1/1000d | Transfer
ErgoSens 1 (Aux1) Off | Door | ->0<- | ->T<- | Print | See Parameter table
er | PreTare | 1/2d | 1/5d | 1/10d |
1/100d | 1/1000d | Transfer | Anti
Static Kit
ErgoSens 2 (Aux2) Off | Door | ->0<- | ->T<- | Print | See Parameter table
er | PreTare | 1/2d | 1/5d | 1/10d |
1/100d | 1/1000d | Transfer | Anti
Static Kit
Values Explanation
Off Sensor deactivated.
Door Opens/closes the glass draft shield (doors).
->0<- Zeros the balance.

->T<- Tares the balance.
Print Starts printing.
ID1 … ID4 Opens the input window for the respective identification.
Header Prints the header.
Footer Prints the footer.
PreTare Opens the input window for numerical entry of a fixed tare weight (subtraction of
tare weight).
1/2d … 1/1000d Switches the weighing result resolution.
Transfer Transfers the stable, formatted weight via the interface.
AntiStatic Kit Activates the ionizer.
To activate the ionizer, it must be selected appropriate to the connection used.
Factory setting: SmartSens left and right configured for door operation (draft shield). Both ErgoSens deac
tivated, [Off].
7.1.17 Settings for the optional anti-static kit (ionizer)

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > AntiStatic Kit
The optional anti-static kit eliminates the build-up of electrostatic charges on weighing objects by ionization.
The ionizer must be connected to one of the two connections "Aux 1" or "Aux 2" at the rear of the balance.
Ionizer is activated under the used connection ErgoSens 1 (Aux1) or ErgoSens 2 (Aux2).
1 Press [ ].
2 Under AntiStatic Kit, tap the associated button.
After door Defines the ionizing status. Inactive | Active*
opened Inactive = no ionizing.
Active = after opening the draft shield, ionizing takes place con
tinuously until the draft shield (doors) is closed again (maximum
10 minutes).
After door Defines the ionizing time (in seconds). 0 … 1000
closed Note (5)*
If the time is set to "0" seconds, no ionizing takes place after
closing the draft shield (doors).
* Factory setting
7.1.18 Settings for electrostatic detection

Navigation: [ ] > [Weighing] > [ ] > ES-Detection
Electrostatic charges on weighing containers or samples can lead to incorrect measurement. The electrostatic
detection is used to measure electrostatic charges and quantify their influence on the weighing result. If a result
exceeds a user-defined threshold value, an appropriate warning is generated.
The visual display in the weighing chamber shows blue during measurement. If a relevant charge is detected,
the visual display flashes as an additional warning next to the warning message on the terminal.

The sample can be discharged by holding and turning it in front of the ionizer for several seconds. Turning the
sample neutralizes enveloping charges.
Ionizer is activated under the used connection ErgoSens 1 (Aux1) or ErgoSens 2 (Aux2).
1 Press [ ].
2 Under ES-Detection, tap the associated button.
Detection mode Defines the electrostatic detection mode. Automatic* | Manual
Automatic = after motorized closure of the doors (manual clo
sure cannot be detected by the balance)
Manual = after pressing the [ES-Det.] function key
Note
Both the detection mode and door function must NOT be set to
Automatic. If both options are set to Automatic, the electrostatic
detection has priority, i.e. the doors are not automatically operat
ed.
Air temp. Defines the threshold value for a warning message. Number in [g]
Number that indicates from which incorrect weight a warning
message is generated.
* Factory setting
7.2 Working with the weighing application

This section describes the use of various functions of the Weighing application in practice.
7.2.1 Changing the weighing result resolution

The balance is set by default so that the weighing result is displayed with the maximum resolution, depending
on the particular model (corresponding to 1d). The weighing result resolution can be changed at any time.
Note
These function keys are inactive when the MinWeigh function is active or a free weighing unit is used.
Function keys are activated.
– Tap the respective function key.
When the respective function key is tapped again, the balance displays the result with normal resolution
again.
1/2d Displays the last decimal place in increments of 2.
1/5d Displays the last decimal place in increments of 5.
1/10d Displays the result in a 10x lower resolution.

7.2.2 Taring options
The tare weight is normally determined by placing the weighing container on the balance and subsequently
pressing the [ ] key. The balance offers further taring options, which facilitate daily working procedures.
Manual entry of the tare weight (subtraction of tare weight or PreTare)
If the same weighing container is used over an extended period, the weight can be entered manually. This
saves taring when placing the weighing container on the balance. The tare weight is displayed as a negative
value when the weighing container is removed. When the container is placed on the balance again, the display
shows zero and the balance is immediately ready to use.
PreTare Function key is activated.
1 Tap [PreTare].
2 Enter the required tare weight.
Check the weighing unit, which is displayed to the right of the tare weight
(free weighing units are not available for manual entry of the tare
weight).
A selection of available units can be displayed by tapping the weighing
unit.
Note
Instead of entering the weight, place the tare container on the weighing
pan and subsequently tap the button with the balance symbol. Wait until
the displayed weight is stable before taking over with [OK]!
3 Confirm with [OK] to activate subtraction of the tare weight.
The value for subtraction of the tare weight remains stored until a new
value is entered, the [ ] or [ ] key is pressed or the balance is
switched off.
Using the automatic taring function

The balance can be configured to always automatically interpret the first applied weight as the tare weight.
AutoTare function is activated.
1 Press [ ] (otherwise the automatic acceptance of the tare weight will not function).
2 Place an empty container on the weighing pan.
When the weight is stable, this is taken over as the tare weight.
The weight display is set to zero and Net symbol is displayed.
3 Start weighing.
When the full container is removed, the Net symbol extinguishes and the stored tare weight is deleted.
Working with the tare memories

If different tare containers are used, their weights can be stored and displayed by pressing a button at any time
whilst weighing. Up to 10 tare memories can be defined.
Note
The memory designations correspond to those defined in the menu, e.g. [Tare1].

Tare Store Function key is activated.
Tare memories are defined and activated.
1 Tap [Tare Store].
2 Tap the required memory.
The associated tare weight is loaded.
The tare weight remains active until a new tare memory is selected, the
[ ] or [ ] button is pressed, the application is changed, a differ
ent user profile is selected or the balance is switched off.
7.2.3 Working with the lot counter

The lot counter places a number in front of each weight during protocol printing, which is automatically incre
mented by 1 with each printout.
Note
When working with the lot counter, it is recommended to also activate the associated information field. This
allows the current lot counter reading to be displayed at any time.
Each time a printout is started with the [ ] button, the weights are preceded by a lot counter, which is incre
mented by 1 with each new printout. When the lot counter reaches the maximum value of 999, the numbering
starts at 1 again.
Note
The lot counter also functions with automatic protocol printout.
See Specifications for automatic protocol printout (page 98).
Example: Printout
1 N 135.87 g
2 N 184.24 g
3 N 117.96 g
Lot counter Function key is activated.

1 Tap [Lot counter].
2 Enter the start value for the lot counter (1 … 999).
The value 0 is preset by default, i.e. the lot counter is deactivated.
3 Confirm with [OK] to activate the lot counter.
7.2.4 Working with identifications

Identifications are descriptive texts for individual weighing processes that allow perfect assignment of weighing
objects to specific customer orders. The identifications are also printed on the protocols (or transferred to a con
nected computer).

The 4 identifications are designated by default with [ID1], [ID2], [ID3] and [ID4]. These designations can be
replaced with other titles to suit the particular application (max. 20 characters). The selected designations (e.g.
customer for the [ID1], order for the [ID2], lot for the [ID3] and batch for the [ID4]) are subsequently avail
able under the [ID] function key.
Note
If the IDs are deactivated, the function key is grayed and cannot be actuated. In this case, the IDs must first be
activated before they can be used.
See Definition of identifications and protocol headers (page 107).
When working with identifications, it is recommended to also activate the respective information fields. The
information fields show the designations entered for the identifications.
If the weighing protocol is defined in such a way that the identifications are also printed, the defined ID designa
tions, e.g. [Customer] and the entered text, e.g. METTLER TOLEDO are printed out.
Example: Printout
------- Weighing -------

25.Jul 2013 17:21
Client
METTLER TOLEDO
Order MT-18/2004
Lot 18/2B
Sample 1/4
N 242.83 g
T 20.76 g
G 263.59 g
ID Function key is activated.

1 Tap [ID].
A selection window with the available identifications is displayed.
2 Tap the associated button to be processed, e.g. [Customer].
3 Enter the designation, e.g. METTLER TOLEDO and confirm with [OK].
When all entries have been made, the selected identifications can be
rechecked against the information fields in the display.
All identification texts remain stored until they are replaced with new
ones.
7.2.5 Weighing-in to a nominal weight

The [Weighing] application offers additional functions that facilitate weighing-in to a defined nominal weight.
Initial settings
To enter the nominal weight and the associated tolerance range, enable the function keys listed below. Also
enable the data fields with the same names so that the defined values will be displayed.

Nominal – Enable function keys.
+Tolerance
-Tolerance
Procedure
1 Tap [Nominal].
2 Enter the required value.
- If a weight corresponding to the nominal weight is already on the balance, it can be directly taken over by
tapping the button with the balance icon.
Check the weighing unit to the right of the nominal weight.
A selection of available units can be displayed by tapping the weighing unit.
Note
Units are not converted automatically. When a value is entered in a unit, it is retained, even when the unit is
changed.
3 Confirm with [OK] to activate the nominal weight.
4 Tap [+Tolerance] and/or [-Tolerance]
Both tolerances are set to 2.5% by default. Instead of a percentage, an absolute tolerance can be entered in
any unit, e.g. [g].
6 Confirm with [OK] to activate the tolerance.
The SmartTrac graphic weighing-in aid with tolerance marks to facilitate weighing-in to the nominal weight
is displayed.
Samples can be roughly weighed until the lower tolerance limit is reached and subsequent additions made
up to the nominal weight.
7.2.6 Working with the "MinWeigh" function

The MinWeigh function ensures that the weighing results are within defined tolerances appropriate to the
requirements of your quality assurance system. This function must be activated and programmed by a service
engineer.
It also recommended to activate the three information fields MinWeigh, RefTare and Tare.
Note
If several reference tare weights (and the associated minimum weights) were programmed by the service engi
neer, the required minimum weight automatically changes appropriate to the applied tare weight.
The weighing result can be printed with the [ ] key. The example printout shows part of a sample protocol
containing specifications for the MinWeigh function (method, reference tare weight and required minimum
weight) as well as the current weights. The asterisk to the left of the net weight indicates that the minimum
weight in the example was not reached and the value does not satisfy the quality assurance requirements.

Example: Printout
MW-Method USP
Ref. Tare 120.00 g
MinWeigh 20.00 g
*N 17.03 g
T 46.85 g
G 63.88 g
MinWeigh function is activated.

1 Activate the MinWeigh, RefTare and Tare information fields.
The values and references are displayed in the information field.
In the display to the left of the weighing result is a small weight icon with the character "<".
2 Press [G].
Sets the display to zero.
3 Place the tare weight (weighing container) on the weighing pan and press [H] to tare the
balance.
The balance determines the tare weight and displays it in the Tare information field.
The Net symbol (net weight) is displayed next to the weight display.
4 Place the weighing object on the balance, e.g. 20 g.
During the weighing operation, the weight is initially displayed in a light color to indicate
that the minimum weight has not yet been reached.
When the required minimum weight is reached, the weight is displayed in dark digits and the
small weight icon extinguishes.
Note
If the status icon (small weight icon with clock) appears at the top right of the display (below the
date and time), the next test for the MinWeigh function is due. Contact the relevant customer ser
vice department. A service engineer will perform the MinWeigh test as quickly as possible.
Example
When working according to GMP, the permissible tolerance is 1%, 2 s. When working according to USP, this
is 0.1 %, 2 s.
7.3 Balance adjustment and testing

Like any precision instrument, the balance must be adjusted at regular intervals. The balance offers extensive
options for adjustment and testing.
Deviations must be able to be identified at an early stage and process tolerances checked. The risk can be min
imized by regular testing.
The adjustment is intended for adjusting the sensitivity of the balance. For this purpose, at least one reference
weight is placed on the weighing pan either manually or motorized. This is weighed and the indicated weight is
stored. The sensitivity of the balance is subsequently corrected by the required amount.
The test is intended for testing the sensitivity of the balance.
See Settings for adjustments and tests (page 43).
The balance is set to full automatic adjustment with ProFACT at the factory. ProFACT adjusts the balance fully
automatically based on predefined criteria. Manual adjustments and/or tests can be carried out as required with
the internal or an external weight.
If a printer is connected to the balance, the adjustments can be printed out according to user-specific settings.

See Protocol – Definition of adjustment and test reports (page 71).
The following descriptions assume that the [Adjust.int], [Adjust.ext], [Test int] and [Test ext] function keys
are activated for adjustment and tests.
7.3.1 Adjustment
7.3.1.1 Adjustment with internal weight/ProFACT

ProFACT adjusts the balance fully automatically based on predefined criteria.
Note
ProFACT is activated several times in the first 24 hours after connection to the power supply, irrespective of the
selected criteria.
After meeting a predefined time and/or temperature criterion, the small ProFACT status icon appears
at the top right of the display (below the date and time). The balance thus indicates the need to
make a ProFACT adjustment.
1 Unload the balance.
2 Do not select any key for 2 minutes.
Adjustment starts automatically.
During the adjustment, a window with information on the current adjustment is displayed. If the balance is in
use at the time of adjustment, adjustment can be ended with the [Cancel] button. Adjustment is restarted by the
balance at the next opportunity.
When adjustment is complete, the balance automatically returns to the application. The small weight icon at the
top right of the display extinguishes. Each adjustment is automatically recorded based on the selections made
in the system settings for recording adjustments
The described procedure is based on the factory setting. The procedure for internal adjustment can be extended
with internal tests with Advanced Options.
See Extended options (page 67).
Manual adjustment activation
Adjust.int Adjustment of the balance with the built-in weight can be initiated by tapping
this function key. This can take place as required.
[Adjust.int] function key is activated.

1 Tap [Adjust.int].
An information window opens.
The motorized lowering and lifting motion of the internal weight is audible.
2 If Adjustment done is displayed, confirm with [OK].
3 If Adjustment abort is displayed:
- If adjustment is aborted, confirm with [OK].
- If adjustment is aborted by the balance, tap [Retry].
7.3.1.2 Adjustment with external test weight

Note
Depending on the country-specific requirements, adjustment with an external weight for calibration balances
may not be available.

When a specific day or time is reached, the small adjustment icon appears at the top right of the
display (below the date and time). This is an indication that the balance requires adjustment.
The balance then requests adjustment at the defined time. The last selected test weight is always
used for automatic external adjustment.
Autom. ext. Adjust. is activated.
Test/Adj. Weight are defined.
1 Tap [Yes] to start the adjustment sequence described below.
2 When is [Later] tapped, a request for adjustment is repeated after 15 minutes.
Note
The small weight icon (status icon) for automatic external adjustment at the top right of the dis
play, extinguishes after successful adjustment or if adjustment is declined at the second request
[No]. The balance automatically returns to the application. Each adjustment is automatically
recorded based on the selections made in the system settings for recording adjustments
Manual adjustment activation

Adjust.ext Adjustment of the balance with an external test weight can be initiated by
tapping this function key. This can take place as required.
Adjustment sequence
[Adjust.ext] function key is activated.
1 Tap [Adjust.ext].
A list is displayed for selection of the test weight.
2 Select a test weight by tapping.
Adjustment starts.
3 Use the correct test weight. The ID and certificate number of the respective test weight are displayed if avail
able.
Note
Ensure that the correct test weight is used, otherwise the adjustment will be aborted with an error message.
The required weight flashes at the bottom of the window and adjustment takes place automatically.
4 Remove the test weight from the weighing pan when adjustment is complete.
When the process is complete, one of the following messages is displayed.
- If adjustment is aborted, confirm with [OK].
- If adjustment is aborted by the balance, tap [Retry].
7.3.2 Testing
7.3.2.1 Testing the adjustment with internal weight

The test is intended for testing the sensitivity of the balance.
Test int The balance can be tested for correct adjustment using the internal weight by
tapping this function key. This can be carried out as required.
[Test int] function key is activated.

1 Tap [Test int].

The motorized lowering and lifting motion of the internal weight is audible.
When the process is complete, one of the following messages is displayed.
2 If Test done is displayed, confirm with [OK].
3 If Test Aborted! is displayed:
- If the test is aborted by the user, confirm with [OK].
- If the test aborted by the balance, tap [Retry].
7.3.2.2 Testing the adjustment with external test weight

When a specific day or time is reached, the small test icon appears at the top right of the display
(below the date and time). This is an indication that the balance requires testing.
For the automatic external test, the last selected test weight is always used.
Autom. ext. Test is activated.
1 Tap [Yes] to start the test sequence described below.
2 When [Later] is tapped, a request for testing the adjustment is repeated after 15 minutes.
Note
The small weight icon (status icon) for automatic external adjustment at the top right of the dis
play, extinguishes after successful testing or if the test is declined at the second request [No].
Manual test activation

Test ext The balance can be tested for correct adjustment with an external test weight
by tapping this function key. This can be carried out as required.
[Test ext] function key is activated.

1 Tap [Test ext].
A list is displayed for selection of the test weight.
2 Select a test weight by tapping.
The test starts.
3 Use the correct test weight. The ID and certificate number of the respective test weight are displayed if avail
able.
Note
Ensure that the correct test weight is used, otherwise the test sequence will be aborted with an error mes
sage.
The required weight flashes at the bottom of the window and the test sequence takes place automatical
ly.
4 Remove the test weight from the weighing pan when the test is complete.
When the test is complete, one of the following messages is displayed.
- If the test is aborted by the user, confirm with [OK].
- If the test aborted by the balance, tap [Retry].
7.3.3 Protocols
The detail of the record depends on the selected settings.
See Protocol – Definition of adjustment and test reports (page 71).

[Adj. History] function key is activated.
1 Adjustments and tests can be displayed by tapping [Adj. History].
2 Press [ ] to print.
7.3.3.1 Adjustment and test records (sample records)

Example: Printout
Internal or ProFACT adjustment protocol External adjustment protocol
- Internal adjustment -- - External adjustment --

25.Jul 2013 16:02 25.Jul 2013 16:12
METTLER TOLEDO METTLER TOLEDO

User Name User 1 User Name User 1
Balance Type XPE204 Balance Type XPE204

WeighBridge SNR: WeighBridge SNR:
1234567890 1234567890
Terminal SNR: 1234567891 Terminal SNR: 1234567891
Balance ID Lab A/1 Balance ID Lab A/1
Weight ID ECW-6000/1
Temperature 21.2 °C Certificate No. MT-414/A
Temperature 20.8 °C
Balance is levelled Nominal 200.00 g
Adjustment done Balance is levelled
Signature Adjustment done
........................ Signature
------------------------
........................
Note ------------------------
No signature line is printed for a ProFACT adjustment.

Internal test protocol External test protocol
---- Internal test ----- ---- External test -----

25.Jul 2013 16:22 25.Jul 2013 16:32
METTLER TOLEDO METTLER TOLEDO

User Name User 1 User Name User 1
Balance Type XPE204 Balance Type XPE204

WeighBridge SNR: WeighBridge SNR:
1234567890 1234567890
Terminal SNR: 1234567891 Terminal SNR: 1234567891
Balance ID Lab A/1 Balance ID Lab A/1
Temperature 19.8 °C Weight ID ETW-200/1
Nominal 100.0000 % Certificate No. MT-806/5
Actual 99.9981 % Temperature 20.2 °C
Diff -0.0019 % Nominal 200.00 g
Actual 199.90 g
Balance is levelled Diff -0.10 g
Test done Balance is levelled
Signature Test done
........................ Signature
------------------------
........................
------------------------
7.4 Working with the test sequence function

Define test sequences, test (method) and weight to be used. The user is guided through the test with the display
of clear instructions. The test should be carried out according to GWP® or other QM systems.
All parameters and values for the test sequence have been defined and the test sequence assigned to a task.
Define tasks - when and how the test sequence will be carried out. If standard is selected under the [Prepara
tion Instructions] menu item, preparatory instructions are displayed in the test sequence. These correspond to
the typical SOP standard. These instructions must be followed and confirmed with [OK] before the rest of the
test sequence can be continued.
Note
The extensiveness of the test depends on the settings selected (e.g. Preparation Instructions, Action if Failure,
AutoZero).
See Test sequences (page 45) and Configuration of test sequence parameters (page 46).
On completion of the test, the measurements are printed together with the results.
A method describes the type of test to be carried out and defines the main purpose of a test sequence. There are
8 different methods available.
7.4.1 Starting a task
A task can be started either automatically or manually depending on the particular settings.

When a specific day or time is reached, the small GWP icon appears at the top right of the display
(below the date and time). This is an indication that the balance requires a task to be performed.
An instruction window is simultaneously displayed, which guides the user through the test. These
instructions must be followed.
Test sequence is defined and assigned to a task.
1 Follow the instructions and confirm with [OK].
2 Remove all weights and confirm with [OK].
3 Level the balance and confirm with [OK].
4 Follow further instructions depending on the selected task.
Note
The instruction window is closed and the small GWP icon for the task at the top right of the display
extinguishes on successful completion of the test.
Manual test activation

Test Sequence A test sequence can be started manually by tapping the function key.
[Test Sequence] function key is activated.

1 Tap [Test Sequence].
A selection window with test sequences is displayed.
2 Tap the test sequence.
An instruction window is displayed.
The test sequence was started
Follow the instructions below:
1. Clean the weighing pan.
2. Level the balance.
3. Switch on the printer if necessary.
4. Have the test weights ready.
5. Have the weight tweezers/fork ready.
When all instructions have been followed, confirm with [OK] and follow further test sequence instruc
tions.
4 Level the balance and confirm with [OK].
7.4.1.1 EC Method for eccentric load test

necessary user SOP tolerances.
3
2
1
4
The result corresponds to the highest of the 4 determined eccentric load deviations.
Method
The procedure is as follows:
1 Zero the balance.
2 Place the test weight in the center and confirm with [OK].
3 Place the test weight at the front left and confirm with [OK].
4 Place the test weight at the rear left and confirm with [OK].
5 Place the test weight at the rear right and confirm with [OK].

6 Place the test weight at the front right and confirm with [OK].
8 Zero the balance.
The test results are displayed together with the results.
The test is printed out.
7.4.1.2 RP1 Method for repeatability test

The RP1 method calculates the mean and standard deviation (Symbol s) of a series of measurements with a
single test weight in order to determine the repeatability of the balance.
Method
1 Zero the balance.
2 Place the test weight on the balance and confirm with [OK].
3 Remove the test weight and confirm with [OK].
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3.
5 Zero the balance.
7.4.1.3 RPT1 Method for repeatability test with tare weight

The RPT1 method calculates the mean and standard deviation (Symbol s) of a series of measurements with
two test weights in order to determine the repeatability. In contrast to the RP1 method, a second test weight is
used to simulate the use of a tare container.
Method
1 Zero the balance.
2 Place the tare weight on the balance and confirm with [OK].
3 Tare the balance.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5.
7 Zero the balance.

7.4.1.4 SE1 Method for sensitivity test with one test weight
The SE1 method tests the sensitivity of the balance with one test weight.
Method
1 Zero the balance.
4 Zero the balance.
7.4.1.5 SE2 Method for sensitivity test with two test weights

The SE2 method tests the sensitivity of the balance with two test weights.
Method
1 Zero the balance.
2 Place test weight 1 on the balance and confirm with [OK].
3 Remove test weight 1 and confirm with [OK].
4 Zero the balance.
7 Zero the balance.
7.4.1.6 SERVICE method reminder/pre-warning time

The SERVICE method is a special method that requires no test weight. It is normally set to perform regular
checks of various data (dates) in the background. It usually ends automatically without any user action and
displayed messages. It is normally used as a reminder for the next service date or MinWeigh date. The date is
checked on a regular basis and a message is only displayed when the defined task is due. The SERVICE
method can also be used to draw early attention to a due test appropriate to the pre-warning time.
[Test Sequence] function key is activated.
– Carry out the task.
7.4.1.7 SET1 Method for sensitivity test with tare weight and one test weight
The SET1 method tests the sensitivity of the balance with two test weights. The first test weight is used to simu
late a tare container.

Method
1 Zero the balance.
3 Tare the balance.
6 Zero the balance.
7.4.1.8 SET2 Method for sensitivity test with tare weight and two test weights
The SET2 method tests the sensitivity of the balance with three test weights. The second test weight (tare
weight) is used to simulate a tare container.
Method
1 Zero the balance.
4 Zero the balance.
6 Tare the balance.
9 Zero the balance.

8 Statistics Application
Navigation: [ ] > [Statistics]
cation.
The application allows you to generate and evaluate statistics for a series of weighings. It can handle 1 to 999
values.
The Statistics application has the same basic features as the Weighing application. However, it includes addi
tional settings and functions for statistical data acquisition and evaluation of a series of weighings.
Only the settings and functions that differ from those of the Weighing application are described in detail below.
Note
If you use statistics together with the LV11, please observe the information in the "Solution Guide", which can
be obtained online at http://www.mt.com.
1 Press [ ].
2 Tap the [Statistics] icon in the selection window.
Some of the specific function keys and data fields for statistics are enabled by default (factory defaults).
The two function keys [Result] and [CL Result] are disabled and are therefore shown differently
because there is no statistical data available at this point in time.
8.1 Settings for the Statistics application

Navigation: [ ] > [Statistics] > [ ]
Several specific settings are available for statistics. You can use them to adapt the application to your needs.
Most of the setting options are the same as for the Weighing application. Only the settings that differ are
described below.
Function Keys Define which function keys for statistics are shown See Specific function keys for using
at the bottom of the display. statistics (page 130)
tions.
Info Field Define which data fields for statistics are displayed. see Specific data fields for statistics
(page 130)
Autom. Weight Activates/deactivates automatic weight entry. see Specifications for automatic
Entry weight entry (page 131)
Protocol Select data to be shown on the weighing protocol. See Specific protocol information for
statistics (page 132)
Additive Weigh Activates/deactivates the additive mode (series see Enable additive mode
ing weighing with automatic taring). (page 134)
Plausibility Define the limit values for plausible weighing See Define plausibility limits
Check results. (page 134)
Statistics Application 129

Tablet Feeder Define the specifications for cooperation between See Settings for the LV11 tablet feed
the statistics function and the LV11 tablet feeder. er (page 135)
8.1.1 Specific function keys for using statistics

Navigation: [ ] > [Statistics] > [ ] > Function Keys
This menu item allows you to enable the specific function keys listed below for using statistics.
All other function keys are the same as for the Weighing application.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
M+ Enters the current value.
Result Opens the results window.
CL Result Clears the results memory.
CL Last Deletes the last saved value.
Nominal Defines the desired nominal weight.

+Tol Defines the accuracy (tolerance range) for weighing to a nominal
weight.
-Tol Defines the accuracy (tolerance range) for weighing to a nominal
weight.
Max n Defines the maximum number of weighings in a series.
Factory setting: [M+], [Result] and [CL Result] are enabled in this order.
8.1.2 Specific data fields for statistics

Navigation: [ ] > [Statistics] > [ ] > Info Field
This menu item provides the data fields listed below for displaying statistical values.

All other data fields are the same as for the Weighing application.
updated.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Values Explanation
n Shows the number of weighings that have been made.
x Shows the average weight of all weighings.
s Shows the standard deviation as an absolute value.
s.rel Shows the standard deviation as a percentage.
Sum Shows the total weight of all individual weighings.
>T+ Shows the number of weighings outside the upper weight tolerance.
<T- Shows the number of weighings outside the lower weight tolerance.
Min Shows the lowest measured weight of the current series.
Max Shows the highest measured weight of the current series.
Diff. Shows the difference between the lowest and the highest weights.
Factory setting: n, x and s are enabled in this order.
8.1.3 Specifications for automatic weight entry

Navigation: [ ] > [Statistics] > [ ] > Autom. WeightEntry
Here you define whether and under which conditions the balance should automatically enter stable weight val
ues in the statistics. This saves you the effort of tapping the [M+] function key. The value is printed automati
cally.
1 Press [ ].

Limit This value defines which limit must be exceeded for automatic User-defined
entry.
Delay time When the limit is exceeded, the Delay time is started, and when User-defined
it times out the value is captured and entered in the statistics or (displayed in seconds)
transferred over the interface.
8.1.4 Specific protocol information for statistics

Navigation: [ ] > [Statistics] > [ ] > Protocol
Here you define which data appears in the protocols. This large menu item is divided into three sub-menus.
They enable you to make additional settings for the application. The rest of the available protocol data corre
sponds to the data for the Weighing application and is not described here.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Note
gle result.
Result Define which statistical data is to be recorded. See section Recording of results
Use this sub-menu to define which data is printed in the protocol header (before the results).
The header is printed automatically for series weighings when the first weight value is entered in the statistics
by tapping the [M+] function key.

Values Explanation
Plausibility Recorded the defined limit for the plausibility of weight values.
Max n Recorded the defined maximum number of weighings in the series.
Values Explanation
Plausibility Recorded the defined limit for the plausibility of weight values.
Tap the [M+] function key to enable automatic printing of single values during a series of weighings.
An single value can also be printed separately by pressing the [ ] key.
Recording of results
Here you can define which additional data is to be recorded in the results protocol.
The result protocol can be printed by pressing the [ ] key with the result window.
If a specific number of samples [Max n] is defined for a weighing series, the results protocol is automatically
printed after the weight of the last sample has been entered in the statistics.
Values Explanation
>Tol+,<Tol- Recorded the number of weighings that are outside the tolerance range.
n Recorded the number of weighed samples.
x Recorded the average weight of the total number of samples.
The value is recorded with the current display unit. The resolution of the recorded
value is ten times higher than the resolution of the measured value with the highest
resolution in the series.
s Recorded the standard deviation as an absolute value.
The value is recorded with the current display unit. The resolution of the recorded
value is ten times higher than the resolution of the measured value with the highest
Note
The value is only recorded if there are at least three values in the statistics. Other
wise a dash is shown instead of a value.
s.rel Recorded the relative standard deviation within the series as a percentage.
The value is always recorded with a resolution of two decimal places.
Note

Min,Max,Diff Max = Recorded the highest measured weight of the current series.
The number of decimal places and the unit are the same as those used to display
the result when the measured value was entered.
Min = Recorded the lowest measured weight of the current series.
The number of decimal places and the unit are the same as those used to display
the result when the measured value was entered.
Diff. = Recorded the difference between the highest and lowest measured weights in
the current series.
The value is recorded with the current display unit. The number of decimal places of
the recorded value corresponds to the number of decimal places of the highest or
lowest weight with the highest resolution.
Sum Recorded the total weight of all saved individual weighings.
The value is recorded with the current display unit. The number of decimal places
corresponds to the number of decimal places of the measured value with the highest
Factory setting: n, x, s and s.rel are enabled in this order.
8.1.5 Enable additive mode

Navigation: [ ] > [Statistics] > [ ] > Additive Weighing
You can use this menu item to enable or disable additive mode. When additive mode is enabled, it is not nec
essary to remove the samples from the weighing pan during a series of weighings.
1 Press [ ].
2 Tap the [On] button for Additive Weighing.
Off Additive mode is disabled. None
On Additive mode is enabled. None
The balance is automatically tared after a weighing result has
been entered in the statistics, either manually or automatically.
The next sample can be weighed out without removing the previ
ous sample from the weighing pan.
8.1.6 Define plausibility limits

Navigation: [ ] > [Statistics] > [ ] > PlausibilityCheck
Plausibility checking is a security precaution. It prevents the entry of incorrect values in the statistics. Here you
can define the limit value (as percentage) for the plausibility of the weighing results.
Example
With a plausibility limit of 30%, all weight values that are within ±30% of the nominal or average value are
regarded as plausible and are entered in the statistics. All other weight values are ignored and excluded from
the statistics.
Note
When you have defined a nominal weight value and tolerance limits, make sure that the plausibility limit for the
weight is greater than the selected tolerance limits. Otherwise values that are actually within tolerance may not
be entered in the statistics.
See Weighing out to a nominal value (page 138).
1 Press [ ].

2 Under PlausibilityCheck, tap the associated button.
Plausibility Define the plausibility limit for measured values. any
Check The percentage relates to the defined nominal value. If no nomi (30 %)*
nal value is defined, the limit relates to the average of the already
weighed out samples of a weighing series.
* Factory setting
8.1.7 Settings for the LV11 tablet feeder

Navigation: [ ] > [Statistics] > [ ] > Tablet Feeder
If you use the METTLER TOLEDO LV11 tablet feeder, you can configure the settings for this peripheral device
here.
Note
If you connect an LV11 to your balance, you have to configure the interface appropriately in the system set
tings.
Tablet Feeder is activated.
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Tablet Feeder, tap the [Define] button.
Tablet Feeder window is displayed.
Feed Rate Defines the feed rate. slow | normal* | fast |
very fast
On Activates/deactivates the emptying function. On | Off*
On = the feed tray of the LV11 is automatically emptied after
weighing the last sample of a weighing series.
Off = no automatic emptying.
* Factory setting
8.2 Working with the Statistics application

Navigation: [ ] > [Statistics]
This section describes how to use the Statistics application. Among other things, you can determine a tare
weight, change the resolution of the weighing result or use identifiers.
You are probably already familiar with these options from the Weighing application. They are therefore not
described again here.

8.2.1 Capturing statistics from a weighing series
For optimal use of the statistical functions, you should have a printer connected to your balance. Otherwise we
recommend that you enable the four statistical data fields that are the most important for your application (e.g.
n, x, s and Sum).
Initial settings
To use statistics, you must enable at least the following three function keys:
M+ – Enable function keys.
Result
CL Result
We also recommend enabling the following two function keys: They allow you to delete incorrect values [CL
Last] and to define the number of samples to be included in a series of weighings [Max n].
CL Last – Enable additional function keys.
Max n
Procedure
Series weighing
If the number of samples to be weighed out for a series is specified, tap the [Max n] function key and enter the
number of samples (1 to 999). The series is terminated automatically after the last sample has been weighed
out. The result window is opened and the result log is printed. This function key is only active when no mea
surement data is present in the statistics. If you enter 0 (zero) for [Max n], the series does not have a defined
limit and you can weigh out a maximum of 999 samples.
When working with a weighing container, place the container on the balance and press the [ ] key to tare
the balance.
Alternatively you can use the tare memory or the automatic taring function. These functions are described in the
instructions for the Weighing application.
Note
If you start a weighing series with a user-defined weighing unit, the unit cannot be changed until the series of
measurements is finished.
See Defining free weighing units (page 99).
The balance is tared [ ].
1 Tap [Max n].
2 Enter the number and confirm with [OK].
3 Load the first sample and tap the [M+] function key.
When the weight is stable (the dashes disappear), it is entered in the statistics.
The protocol header and the result (single value) of the current weighing are printed.

4 Remove the first sample.
If the additive mode is activated, the sample can remain on the weighing pan. The balance is automatically
tared after each weight is entered in the statistics.
5 Load further samples in succession. Confirm each weight with the [M+] function key (unnecessary if auto
matic weight entry is activated).
6 Remove the sample and tare the balance (unnecessary if additive mode is activated).
Each value is automatically recorded after being entered in the statistics.
After the last sample is weighed, the result window is automatically opened and printed.
The result window contains the results of a series of weighings. The information selected for result
recording is displayed.
If the result window consists of several screen pages, paging between the individual pages can take
place with the two arrow keys.
7 Tap [CL Result] to end measurement and clear the memory for the next series.
A confirmation window is displayed.
8 To delete the statistics, confirm with [OK].
The statistics are deleted.
The function key is inactive and grayed.
Sample weighing
1 Load the sample and tap the [M+] function key.
When the weight is stable (the dashes disappear), it is entered in the statistics.
2 Remove the sample.
3 Tap [Result].
The result window is displayed.
4 Press [ ] to print the result protocol.
5 Tap [OK] to exit the result window.
6 Tap [CL Result] to end measurement and clear the memory for the next series.
Note
An error message is displayed if you tap the [M+] function key but no weight change has occurred. This pre
vents you from accidentally acquiring the sample twice.
If you have mistakenly weighed out an incorrect amount and stored the weighing result, you can use the [CL
Last] function key to cancel the last value. It is only available if values are already present in the memory; oth
erwise the key is grayed out and cannot be actuated. The key is disabled after a value is deleted and is not
enabled again until the next value has been entered in the statistics.

If a weight value is outside the plausibility limit, a corresponding error message is displayed after the [M+] key
is tapped. The value cannot be entered in the statistics. No error message is displayed if automatic weight entry
is enabled. However, the value is not entered in the statistics and it does not appear in the statistics protocol.
8.2.2 Weighing out to a nominal value

The Statistics application provides additional functions that simplify weighing out samples to a defined nomi
nal value. You can use these functions for individual weighings or for series weighings with statistics.
Initial settings
To enter the nominal weight and the associated tolerance range, enable the function keys listed below. Also
enable the data fields with the same names so that the defined values will be displayed.
+Tolerance
-Tolerance
Procedure
Important
Ensure that the plausibility limit is greater than the defined tolerance values. Weights that are within the toler
ance range but greater than the plausibility limit cannot be entered in the statistics. If necessary, change the
plausibility limit for the weight values.
See Define plausibility limits (page 134).
Note
The function keys for entering the nominal weight and the tolerance range are disabled if values are already
present in the statistics. In this case, you must clear the statistics with the [CL Last] function key before you
can define the nominal weight and the tolerance range.
Statistics are deleted.
1 Tap the [Nominal] function key.
Note
changed.
4 Tap the [+Tolerance] and/or [-Tolerance] function key.
any unit, e.g. [g].

Note
Samples outside the tolerance range are specifically marked with >T+ or <T- when single values are record
ed.
is displayed.
8.2.3 Example protocol with statistical values

The detail of a protocol depends on the selected protocol settings. Only application-specific information is
shown in the example printout.
Important information for the interpretation of recorded results
The x and s values are calculated results that are shown with higher resolution than the individual measured
values. The significance of the last decimal place cannot be assured with a relatively small measurement series
(fewer than 10 or so measured values) with small weight differences.
Example: Printout
------ Statistics ------

25.Jul 2013 16:40
User Name User 2
Balance Type XPE204
WeighBridge SNR
1234567890
Terminal SNR 1234567891
Balance ID Lab A/1
Balance is levelled
Plausibility 30 %
Nominal 24.20 g
+Tol 2.5 %
-Tol 2.5 %
1 24.21 g
2 24.67 g
3>T 24.91 g
4 24.18 g
n 4
x 24.493 g
s 0.357 g
s.rel 1.46 %
Min. 24.18 g
Max. 24.91 g
Diff 0.73 g
Sum 97.97 g
------------------------
Signature
........................
------------------------

8.2.4 Formulas used for the calculation of statistical values
Calculation of mean value and standard deviation
Notation
= Individual measured value of a series of measured values i = 1...n
= Mean value and standard deviation of these measured values
The mean value is given by:
1 n (1)
x= ∑ xi
n i =1
The commonly used formula for the calculation of the standard deviation
1 (2)
s=
n −1
(
∑ xi − x ) 2
(2) not suitable for numerical calculation, since in measurements where deviations between single values are
very small, the square of the difference (between the single value and mean value) can lead to cancellation. In
addition, when using this formula, each single measured value must be stored before the standard deviation
can be finally determined.
The following formula is mathematically equivalent, but much more stable numerically. It can be derived by
appropriate transformation from (1) and (2):
2
1  n 2 1  n  
s= ∑ xi −  ∑ xi  
n − 1  i =1 n  i =1  
For the calculation of the mean value and standard deviation, only , ∑ x and ∑ x need to be stored for the use
i i
2
of this formula.
Standard deviation
The numerical stability can be further improved by measured value scaling.
With ∆xi = xi − X 0 whereby X 0 (depending on the application) is either the first measured value of a series of mea
surements or the nominal value of a series of measurements, the following is obtained:
2
1  n 1 n  
s= ∑ i (∆x )2
−  ∑ i  
∆x 
n − 1  i =1 n  i =1 
Mean value
The mean value is calculated accordingly:
1 n
x = X0 + ∑ ∆xi
n i =1
Relative standard deviation

The relative standard deviation can be calculated using the formula:
s percent
srel = 100
x

Number of digits in the results
The mean and standard deviation are always displayed and printed with one decimal place more than the cor
responding single measured values. To be noted for interpretation of the results is that this additional decimal
place has no significance for small series of measurements (less than about 10 measured values).
This applies similarly to percentages (e.g. relative standard deviation), which always has two decimal places
(e.g. 13.45 percent). The significance of the decimal places depends similarly on the magnitude of the original
values!

9 Formulation Application
Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation]
cation.
The majority of application settings are saved under the active user profile. Each user can select specific set
tings for this application. It must be ensured that the required user profile is selected.
The component and formulation databases are independent of the user profile; there is only one database for all
users.
1 Press [ ].
2 Tap the [Formulation] icon in the selection window.
Some of the specific formulation function keys and information fields are activated by default (factory
defaults).
Both [Result] and CL Result] function keys are inactive and therefore grayed out as no formulation is
currently active.
The balance is ready for formulation.
9.1 Formulation application settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation] > [ ]
Different specific formulation settings are available. You can use them to adapt the application to your needs. In
this application, the Info Unit is not available.
described below.
Recipe Definition of formulations. See Definition and activation of for
mulations (page 149)
Component Definition of components. See Definition of components
(page 149)
Autom. Zeroing Activates/deactivates automatic zeroing. see Activation or deactivation of
automatic zeroing (page 143)
Function Keys Defines the formulation function keys that appear at See Specific formulation function
the bottom of the display. keys (page 143)
tions.
Info Field Defines the formulation information fields to be dis See Specific formulation information
played. fields (page 144)
Protocol Selects data to be shown in the weighing protocols. See Specific formulation protocol
information (page 145)
Identification Defines identifications. See Specific formulation identifica
tions (page 147)

Smart & Programs both terminal SmartSens sensors. See Specific SmartSens and
ErgoSens Up to two external ErgoSens (optional) can be ErgoSens formulation settings
assigned a function in this menu. (page 148)
9.1.1 Activation or deactivation of automatic zeroing

Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation] > [ ] > Autom. Zeroing
This menu item can be used to define whether the display is automatically reset to zero after removal of the tare
container.
1 Press the [ ] key.
2 Tap Autom. Zeroing on the associated button.
3 Tap the associated button.
On Activates automatic zeroing. None
When the container is removed after taring the weighing contain
er and weighing-in a component, the display is automatically
reset to zero.
Off Deactivates automatic zeroing. None
9.1.2 Specific formulation function keys

Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation] > [ ] > Function Keys
This menu can be used to activate the following specific formulation function keys.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
M+ Stores the net weight of a weighed component and resets the
weight display to zero.
Formulation Application 143

Recipe Opens the recipe database for selecting a recipe.
Abs/Diff Switches the weight display between the weighed quantity (Abs =
absolute) and the residual quantity to be weighed, until the nomi
nal weight (Diff = difference) is reached.
CompDB Opens the component database for selecting a component.
+Tol Defines the accuracy (tolerance range) for weighing to a nominal

weight.
-Tol Defines the accuracy (tolerance range) for weighing to a nominal
weight.
Factory setting: [M+], [Result], [CL Result], [ID] and [Nominal] activated, in this sequence.
9.1.3 Specific formulation information fields

Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation] > [ ] > Info Field
This menu contains the following formulation information fields.
updated.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Values Explanation
Comp. Weight Displays the current component weight.
Net Tot Displays the total net weight of all weighed components.
>T+ Shows the number of weighings outside the upper weight tolerance.
<T- Shows the number of weighings outside the lower weight tolerance.

Comp. Counter Displays the current component counter reading (consecutive number of current
component).
Recipe Name Shows the name of the current formulation.
Recipe ID Displays the identification entered via the [ID] function key.
Note
The identification designations ID1 are set to the factory defaults, but can be
changed.
Comp. Name Displays the name of the current component.
Comp. ID Displays the identification entered via the [ID] function key.
Note
changed.
Lot ID Displays the identification entered via the [ID] function key.
Note
changed.
Additional ID Displays the identification entered via the [ID] function key.
Note
changed.
Factory setting: Recipe ID, TareGross and Nominal activated, in this sequence.
9.1.4 Specific formulation protocol information

Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation] > [ ] > Protocol
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Note

gle result.
The header is printed automatically when the weight of the first component has been stored during formulation
by tapping the [M+] function key.
Values Explanation
Recipe Name Records the name of the current formulation.
Recipe ID Records the identification of the current formulation entered via the [ID] function key.
Nominal Tot Records the total nominal weight of all components of the current formulation.
Comp. Records the number of components of the current formulation.
Factory setting: Appl. Name, Date/Time, Balance Type SNR and Recipe ID activated, in this sequence.
Single values are automatically printed during formulation by tapping the [M+] function key.
Comp. ID Records the identification of the current component entered via the [ID] function key
ID3.
Lot ID Records the identification of the current component entered via the [ID] function key
ID2.
Additional ID Records the identification of the current component entered via the [ID] function key
ID4.
Comp. Name Records the name of the current component.
Comp. Counter Records the current component counter reading (consecutive number of current
component).
Net % Records the weight of the current component in % of the nominal weight.
Diff. Records the difference between the actual and nominal weight of the current compo
nent.
Diff. %Net % Records the percentage deviation of the actual weight of the current component from
its nominal weight.
The result protocol can be printed by pressing the [ ] button with the result window open or automatically
after taking over the last component of a formulation.

Comp. Counter Records the current component counter reading (consecutive number of current
component).
>Tol+,<Tol- Recorded the number of weighings that are outside the tolerance range.
Net Tot Records the total net weight of all weighed components.
Factory setting: Tare, Net Tot, Gross, Signature, Dash Line and 3 Blank Lines activated, in this sequence.
9.1.5 Specific formulation identifications

Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation] > [ ] > Identification
This menu item can be used to activate the 4 identifications available for formulation via the [ID] function key.
Individual identifications can be deactivated or their designations replaced with specific texts (max. 20 charac
ters). The entered designations also appear as information field designations and are printed in weighing proto
cols. The two headers for the weighing protocols can be defined here; these are printed in the weighing proto
cols.
Note
The [Recipe ID] and [Comp. ID] are not required for the automatic processing of predefined formulations.
These are automatically taken over from the formulation or component database. Further IDs can be activated if
additional designations are required for formulation.
For free formulation (without using the databases), the [Recipe ID] and [Comp. ID] can be activated to assign
a designation to the formulations and components.
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Identification, tap the [Define] button.
Identification window is displayed.
Menu structure
Title 1 T1 See Definition of identifications and
Title 2 T2 protocol headers (page 107)
ID1 Name Recipe ID See Section Identifications
ID2 Name Comp. ID
ID3 Name Lot ID
ID4 Name Additional ID
Identifications
The following designations are defined by default for the 4 identifications.
Recipe ID Activates/deactivates the ID and designation (max. 20 charac Off | On*
ters).
Comp. ID Activates/deactivates the ID and designation (max. 20 charac Off* | On
ters).

Lot ID Activates/deactivates the ID and designation (max. 20 charac Off* | On
ters).
Additional ID Activates/deactivates the ID and designation (max. 20 charac Off* | On
ters).
* Factory setting
9.1.6 Specific SmartSens and ErgoSens formulation settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation] > [ ] > Smart & ErgoSens
Additional settings are available for the SmartSens and ErgoSens sensors.
Note
The settings [Recipe ID], [Comp. ID], [Lot ID] and [Additional ID] correspond to the identifications [ID1] …
[ID4], which are also available in the Weighing application.
When one of the functions is activated, the green F symbol (Function) lights up in the status bar below the
respective sensor.
1 Press [ ].
3 Select the required menu item (e.g. SmartSens left).
Menu structure
Result | M+ | OK | Recipe ID |
Comp. ID | Lot ID | Additional ID
SmartSens right Off | Door | ->0<- | ->T<- | Print |
Comp. ID | Lot ID | Additional ID
ErgoSens 1 (Aux1) Off | Door | ->0<- | ->T<- | Print |
Comp. ID | Lot ID | Additional ID |
AntiStatic Kit
Comp. ID | Lot ID | Additional ID |
AntiStatic Kit
Values Explanation
Result Emulates the function key with the same name. Opens the result window.
M+ Emulates the function key with the same name. Takes over the current value.
OK Emulates pressing of the button with the same name in the formulation dialog (how
ever not in the menus) for confirmation of entries and actions.
tivated, [Off].

9.2 Definition of components
Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation] > [ ] > Component
Each formulation consists of one or more components. The components must be defined prior to formulation.
The balance contains a component database. This database can store up to 100 components. Each compo
nent consists of a name and identification (ID). The firmware checks the entries for plausibility. If a name or ID
already used by another component is entered, an error message is displayed. This section describes the pro
cedure for the definition of components.
Note
The component database is independent of the user profile; there is only one component database for all users.
For subsequently changing already defined components, see Information on changing existing components
and formulations (page 160).
The contents of the component database can be recorded at any time by pressing the [ ] button. The compo
nent names and numbers are printed.
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Component, tap the [Define] button.
The arrow keys can be used to page between individual pages.
or
Tap the button [Go to] and enter the component number. All of the 100 components can be directly select
ed in this way.
The first page of the component database is displayed.
The database contains a total of 20 pages with 5 components respectively.
3 Tap the components to be defined.
4 Under Component Name, tap the associated button.
6 Under Comp. ID, tap the associated button.
Component Definition of a designation (max. 20 characters). Any
Name Note
The current designation of the respective product can be used as
a name.
Comp. ID Definition of an identification (max. 20 characters). Any
Note
The ID is frequently scanned via a barcode reader for clear
assignment of the components to the corresponding product.
9.3 Definition and activation of formulations

Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation] > [ ] > Recipe

The balance contains a formulation database in which a maximum of 8 formulations with up to 12 compo
nents respectively can be stored. To fully define formulations, the respective components must be available in
the component database. Each formulation is stored under a name. The definition of an identification (ID) is
only required when work is carried out with Security Check or if the ID is to be included in the weighing proto
cols. The firmware checks the entries for plausibility. If a name or an ID already used by another formulation is
entered, an error message is displayed. This section describes the procedure for the definition of formulations.
Note
The formulation database is independent of the user profile; there is only one formulation database for all users.
For subsequently changing already defined components, see Information on changing existing components
and formulations (page 160).
9.3.1 Formulation with fixed components (absolute nominal weights)

Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation] > [ ] > Recipe > [Define] > Recipe 2 > [Fix Component]
As long as the menu for the definition of a specific formulation is active, current formulation settings and data
can be recorded at any time by pressing the [ ] key.
Example: Printout
Recipe 2 Fix Component

Name Eraphtene
ID ERA-1
Security Check Off
Procedure 1 Tare
Component 1
Name Renith 80 o/o
ID R80
Component Weight
24.16 g
+Tolerance 2.50 %
-Tolerance 2.50 %
Component 2
Name Lorine-BR
ID LBR
Component Weight
16.45 g
+Tolerance 2.50 %
-Tolerance 2.50 %
Component 3
Name Alcohol 90 o/o
ID Alco 90
Component Weight
77.00 g
+Tolerance 2.50 %
-Tolerance 2.50 %
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Recipe, tap the [Define] button.
Formulation window is displayed.
3 Tap, e.g. Recipe 2 and subsequently the [Off] button.
Recipe 2 window is displayed.
4 Tap [Fix Component] and subsequently the [Define] button.

5 Under Recipe Name, tap the associated button.
7 Under Recipe ID, tap the associated button.
9 Under Security Check, tap the associated button.
10 Activate/deactivate Security Check.
11 Under Procedure, tap the associated button.
12 Select a process.
13 Change the menu page with the arrow keys.
14 Tap the button of the component to be included in the formulation.
A window is displayed in which the component can be activated.
15 Tap [Component] and subsequently the [Define] button.
16 Under Component Name or Comp. ID tap the associated button.
A window with the component database is displayed.
17 Select the component by tapping.
18 Under Component Weight, tap the associated button.
20 Under +Tolerance and/or -Tolerance tap the associated button.
Formulation parameters
Recipe Name Definition of a designation (max. 20 characters). Any
Recipe ID Definition of an identification (max. 20 characters). Any
Note
The definition of an identification (ID) is only required when work
is carried out with Security Check or the ID is to be included in
the weighing protocols.
Security Check With Security Check activated, the entry of a formulation ID (and On | Off*
component IDs) is required for each formulation. Formulation is
only continued when these correspond to the formulation data.
This ensures that work is carried out with the correct formulation
and the correct components are weighed.

Procedure 1 Tare = all components are weighed in 1 container. Only a sin 1 Tare* | n Tare
gle taring is necessary at the start of formulation.
n Tare = each component is weighed in its own container. Taring
must be performed prior to each weighing-in operation.
* Factory setting
Component parameters
Component Definition of components from the component database (max. Component database
Name 100 components).
Comp. ID Definition of components from the component database (max. Component database
100 components).
Component Definition of the required nominal weight. Any
Weight (0.00 g)*
+Tolerance Definition of accuracy (tolerances) for weighing-in to a nominal Any
weight. (2.50%)*
-Tolerance Definition of accuracy (tolerances) for weighing-in to a nominal Any
weight. (2.50%)*
* Factory setting
9.3.2 Formulation with % components (relative nominal weights)

Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation] > [ ] > Recipe > [Define] > Recipe 3 > [% Component]
The definition of formulations with components with relative nominal weights, differs only slightly from that for
formulations with absolute components. Instead of an absolute nominal weight, a percentage nominal weight
must be entered. This refers, depending on the selected Basis, to either the total formulation weight or the first
component.
Note
For formulations with relative nominal component values, no formulation process can be selected as all com
ponents are weighed in 1 container.
As long as the menu for the definition of a specific formulation is active, current formulation settings and data
can be recorded at any time by pressing the [ ] key.
Example: Printout
with relative nominal weights based on the total with relative nominal weights based on the first
weight component

Recipe 3 % Component Recipe 4 % Component
Name Iorex-MP Name Meranit-411
ID IORX ID ME-411
Security Check Off Security Check Off
Basis Total weight Basis 1. Comp. Weight
Component 1 Component 1
Name UM Powder A Name RF Subst. A
ID UPA ID RF-A
Component % 22.6 % Component % 75.0 %
+Tolerance 2.00 % +Tolerance 2.50 %
-Tolerance 2.00 % -Tolerance 2.50 %
Component 2 Component 2
Name UM Powder B Name Sirine Liq. 16
ID UPB ID SI-LIQ
Component % 77.4 % Component % 40.0 %
+Tolerance 3.00 % +Tolerance 1.50 %
-Tolerance 3.00 % -Tolerance 1.00 %
1 Press [ ].
2 Under Recipe, tap the [Define] button.
Formulation window is displayed.
3 Tap, e.g. Recipe 3 and subsequently the [Off] button.
Recipe 3 window is displayed.
4 Tap [% Component] and subsequently the [Define] button.
5 Under Recipe Name, tap the associated button.
7 Under Recipe ID, tap the associated button.
9 Under Security Check, tap the associated button.
10 Activate/deactivate Security Check.
11 Under Basis, tap the associated button.
12 Select a process.
13 Change the menu page with the arrow keys.
14 Tap the button of the component to be included in the formulation.
A window is displayed in which the component can be activated.
15 Tap [Component] and subsequently the [Define] button.
16 Under Component Name or Comp. ID tap the associated button.
A window with the component database is displayed.
17 Select the component by tapping.
18 Under Component %, tap the associated button.

20 Under +Tolerance and/or -Tolerance tap the associated button.
Formulation parameters
Recipe Name Definition of a designation (max. 20 characters). Any
Recipe ID Definition of an identification (max. 20 characters). Any
Note
The definition of an identification (ID) is only required when work
is carried out with Security Check or the ID is to be included in
the weighing protocols.
Security Check With Security Check activated, the entry of a formulation ID (and On | Off*
component IDs) is required for each formulation. Formulation is
only continued when these correspond to the formulation data.
This ensures that work is carried out with the correct formulation
and the correct components are weighed.
Basis Total weight = the nominal percentage of each component is Total weight* | 1.
based on the total weight (final weight) of the formulation. For Comp.Weight
formulation, the required final weight must be entered first. The
nominal weights of the individual components are additionally
automatically calculated in percent.
Note
For formulations with nominal percentages based on the total
weight. The balance does not check whether the total percentage
of all components is 100%. If this value is above or below
100%, the calculated percentages or the nominal weights to be
weighed are automatically adjusted during the weighing opera
tion, as illustrated in the following example:
Formulation data: nominal weight of first component: 80 %,
nominal weight of second component: 40%, final weight: 100 g.
Automatic calculation of the nominal weights to be weighed:
First component: 80%/120% • 100 g = 66.67 g
Second component: 40%/120% • 100 g = 33.33 g
1. Comp.Weight = for formulation, the nominal weight of the first

component must be entered. This weight corresponds to the per
centage defined in the formulation definition. The nominal
weights of the further components are subsequently calculated
automatically in relation to the first component.
Example of a formulation with two components
75% is defined for the first component. 40% is defined for the
second component. For formulation, a nominal weight of 100 g
is defined for the first component. The balance now calculates for
the second component a nominal weight of 53.33 g (100
g/75 % • 40% = 53.33 g).
* Factory setting

Component parameters
Component Definition of components from the component database (max. Component database
Name 100 components).
Comp. ID Definition of components from the component database (max. Component database
100 components).
Component % Definition of the required nominal weight. Any
(0.00 g)*
+Tolerance Definition of accuracy (tolerances) for weighing-in to a nominal Any
weight. (2.50%)*
-Tolerance Definition of accuracy (tolerances) for weighing-in to a nominal Any
weight. (2.50%)*
* Factory setting
9.4 Working with the formulation application

Navigation: [ ] > [Formulation]
This section describes the procedure for working with the application Formulation and recording the results.
9.4.1 Initial settings
A printer must be connected to the balance for recording formulations.
The most important information fields for the application must also be activated (e.g. Recipe Name, Comp.
Name, Nominal and Comp. ID for the automatic processing of formulations.
Depending on the type of formulation, further function keys must be activated.
For each formulation, at least the three following functions keys must be activated.
Result
CL Result
For free formulation without using formulations from the database, the following function keys must also be
activated. The respective values can be entered via these keys.
+Tolerance
-Tolerance
For free formulation, the ID function key must be activated. This allows specific designations to be assigned to
the formulations and components. The activation of this function key can also be useful for automatic formula
tion processing for the assignment of one or two specific IDs to components in addition to those already prede
fined, e.g. a Lot ID.

ID – Function key activation.
When working with components from the component database for free formulation, the CompDB function key
must also be activated. This function key can be used to display components from the database.
CompDB – Function key activation.
For the automatic processing of formulations from the database, the Recipe function key must be activated,
which can also be used for formulation display.
Recipe – Function key activation.
The Abs/Diff function key should also be activated. This allows the weight display to be switched between an
already weighed quantity of a component and the remaining quantity to be weighed.
Abs/Diff – Function key activation.
9.4.2 Free formulation (formulation without using the formulation database)

For using one or several components from the data base for free formulation, the [CompDB] function key must
be activated. This function key can be used for directly accessing the component database and selecting the
required component. In this case, no component ID needs to be entered; this is taken over directly from the
database.
the balance.
Note
The weight display can be switched between an already weighed component quantity and the remaining quan
tity to be weighed with the [Abs/Diff] function key at any time.
If the remaining quantity display (difference) has been selected with the [Abs/Diff] function key prior to entering
the nominal weight, the nominal weight is displayed with a negative sign (weighing-in against zero).
1 Tap [ID].
or
Tap [CompDB].
3 To exit the menu without saving, tap [C].
5 Enter the required value for the first component.

Note
Samples outside the tolerance range are specifically marked with >T+ or <T- when single values are record
ed.
The SmartTrac graphic weighing-in aid with tolerance marks to facilitate weighing-in to the nominal
weight is displayed.
10 Weigh the first component.
11 When the nominal weight is reached or the weight is within the tolerances, tap the [M+] function key to
store the value.
The weight must be previously verified again as the balance does not check whether the weighed value cor
responds to the nominal weight.
The protocol header and the result (single value) of the current component are printed.
The balance is ready for weighing the second component.
12 If a new weighing container is used, the container with the first component must be removed and the bal
ance zeroed [ ]. Place a new container on the balance and tare the balance [ ].
If the second component is weighed in the same container, taring is unnecessary.
13 Define the nominal weight and tolerances.
14 Weigh the second component.
15 The result can be stored by tapping the [M+] function key.
The determined single value is automatically recorded based on specific requirements.
16 Tap [Result]. Only available when values are stored, otherwise the key is grayed and cannot be actuated.
The information selected for result recording is displayed.
17 Press [ ] to print the formulation.
19 Tap [CL Result] to end the formulation and delete the memory for the next formulation.
20 Confirm deletion of the formulation with [OK].
The formulation is deleted.
Weighing further components

The procedure is the same as for the second component with the same or new weighing container.
9.4.3 Automatic formulation processing with "fixed components" (absolute nominal weights)

It is assumed that the relevant formulation has been defined and the required function keys and information
fields are activated.
If the formulation definition requires that each component is weighed in its own container, a request is made
prior to weighing the second component to place the new weighing container on the balance and press the
[ ] key. If the formulation definition requires that all components are weighed in the same container, taring
does not need to repeated. If automatic zeroing is activated, the display is automatically set to zero when the
tare container is removed.
the balance.
Note

The user is responsible for ensuring that the weights are within the defined tolerances as the balance does not
check this automatically. If an incorrect weight is taken over with the [M+] function key, the formulation result
will also be incorrect.
Once a formulation is displayed, neither the identification of the formulation Recipe ID nor those of the compo
nents Comp. ID can be changed as these are part of the respective formulation or component definition in the
databases.
If the [Recipe] function key is grayed, a new formulation cannot be selected as a formulation is being
processed. In this case, tap the [CL Result] function key to end the current formulation.
Formulations are defined.
1 Tap [Recipe].
2 Select a formulation from the formulation database by tapping. The formulation is processed immediately
after selection.
3 Place the weighing container on the balance and press the [ ] key.
The balance is tared and ready for weighing the first component.
4 Weigh the first component.
Refer to the graphic SmartTrac weighing-in aid with tolerance marks to facilitate weighing-in to the nominal
weight. This display must be closely observed as the balance does not check for correspondence between
the weighed and nominal weight.
store the value.
The [Result] function key is active and the result window can be opened. Information on the current for
mulation status is displayed.
When all formulation components have been weighed, the formulation result window is automatically
displayed. The information selected for result recording is displayed. The formulation protocol is simulta
neously completed.


9.4.4 Automatic formulation processing with "% components" (relative nominal weights)
Automatic formulation processing with % Component is basically the same as for formulations with Fix Com
ponent.
Depending on the component weighing method in the formulation definition, a request is initially made after
selecting the formulation to enter the required final weight of the formulation or nominal weight of the first com
ponent.
Formulations are defined.
1 Tap [Recipe].
2 Select a formulation from the formulation database by tapping. The formulation is processed immediately
after selection.
3 Tap the [Enter] button
4 Enter the required value for the first component.
6 Place the weighing container on the balance and press the [ ] button.
The balance is tared and ready for weighing the first component.
The nominal weight is displayed in the Nominal information field. SmartTrac supports weighing-in to the
nominal weight.
store the value.
The [Result] function key is active and the result window can be opened. Information on the current for
mulation status is displayed.
When all formulation components have been weighed, the formulation result window is automatically
displayed. The information selected for result recording is displayed. The formulation protocol is simulta
neously completed.

9.4.5 Sample protocol of a formulation

Example: Printout
----- Formulation ------

25.Jul 2013 12:40
User Name User 3
Balance Type XPE204
WeighBridge SNR
1234567890
Recipe Iorex-MP
Recipe ID IORX
Num. of Comp. 2
Nominal Tot 84.30 g
Comp. ID UPA
Comp 1/2
Nominal 19.22 g
+Tol 0.38 g
-Tol 0.38 g
1 N 19.24 g
1 N 100.1 %
1 Diff 0.02 g
1 Diff 0.1 %
Comp. ID UPB
Comp 2/2
Nominal 65.08 g
+Tol 1.95 g
-Tol 1.95 g
2 N 65.21 g
2 N 100.2 %
2 Diff 0.13 g
2 Diff 0.2 %
Net Tot 84.45 g
Signature
........................
------------------------
9.5 Information on changing existing components and formulations

Stored formulation and component definitions can be changed. The following rules apply.
● While a formulation is being processed, neither stored formulations nor components can be changed.
● If a component which is part of a formulation is changed, the error message This component cannot be
changed. It is used by is displayed. However, if components need to be changed, these must first be deac
tivated in all respective formulations. If components are to be included again in respective formulations after
being changed, the components must be explicitly selected from the component database. Activate the
components in the formulation and re-enter the nominal weights and tolerances. Subsequently change the
formulation name and ID. This avoids confusion with previous formulations with the old definition.

● Components can be removed from the database by deleting their name or ID. However, this is only possible
if the component is not part of a formulation.
● Formulations cannot be deleted from the database. Formulations that are no longer required must be deacti
vated. If a formulation is no longer required, it can only be removed from the database by overwriting it with
a new formulation.

10 Piece Counting Application
Navigation: [ ] > [Piececounting]
cation.
The Piececounting application allows you to determine the number of pieces put on the weighing pan. It is
advantageous if all pieces are of approximately equal weight, since the unit quantity is determined on the basis
of average weight. Various methods can be used to determine the reference unit weight.
1 Press [ ].
2 Tap the [Piececounting] icon in the selection window.
Some of the specific function keys and data fields for piece counting are activated by default (factory
defaults).
The balance is ready for piece counting.
10.1 Piece counting application settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Piececounting] > [ ]
Several specific settings are available for piece counting. You can use them to adapt the application to your
needs.
described below.
Unlike the Weighing application, only one custom unit can be specified. The MinWeigh feature is not avail
able.
FixPcs Definition of a fixed reference unit quantity. See Defining the fixed reference unit
quantity (page 163)
Function Keys Define which function keys for piece counting are See Specific function keys for piece
shown at the bottom of the display. counting (page 163)
tions.
Info Field Define which data fields for piece counting are dis See Specific data fields for piece
played. counting (page 164)
Autom. Weight Activate/deactivate automatic weight entry. See Specifications for automatic
Entry weight entry (page 165)
Display Unit Define the unit for the result display. See Additional unit for piece counting
(page 165)
Info Unit Define an additional weighing unit. This appears in See Additional unit for piece counting
the corresponding data field on the display. (page 165)
Protocol Select data to be shown on the weighing protocol. See Specific protocol data for piece
counting (page 166)

Smart & Programs the two SmartSens sensors on the termi See Specific SmartSens and
ErgoSens nal. Up to two external ErgoSens (optional) can be ErgoSens settings for piece counting
assigned a particular function in this menu. (page 168)
10.1.1 Defining the fixed reference unit quantity

Navigation: [ ] > [Piececounting] > [ ] > FixPcs
Here you define which fixed reference quantity the function key [FixPcs] refers to.
When carrying out piece counting, each time the function key [FixPcs] is tapped, the weight is divided by the
defined, fixed reference unit quantity. This determines the reference unit weight on which the piece counting is
based.
Note
The function key [FixPcs] is labeled with [Fix n], with n being the selected number of reference units.
Example: [Fix 10].
1 Press [ ].
2 Under FixPcs, tap the associated button.
Function key is labeled with a new reference unit quantity.
Factory setting: [Fix 10] PCS.
10.1.2 Specific function keys for piece counting

Navigation: [ ] > [Piececounting] > [ ] > Function Keys
This menu item allows you to activate the specific function keys listed below for piece counting.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
FixPcs Determines the reference unit weight with a defined, fixed number
of pieces.
Piece Counting Application 163

VarPcs Selects the reference unit quantity.
PcsWgt Enters the known weight of a reference unit.
RefOpt Performs reference optimization.
M+ Saves the current unit quantity to the memory.
CL Last Deletes the last saved value.
Nominal Defines the desired nominal unit quantity.

Abs/Diff Switches the weight display between the unit quantity already
weighed in and the number of units still to be weighed in until the
nominal unit quantity is reached.
+Tol Defines the accuracy (tolerance range) for piece counting.
-Tol Defines the accuracy (tolerance range) for piece counting.
Max n Defines the maximum number of piece counts in a series.
Factory setting: [PcsWgt], [FixPcs], [VarPcs] and [Nominal] are activated in this order.
10.1.3 Specific data fields for piece counting

Navigation: [ ] > [Piececounting] > [ ] > Info Field
This menu item provides the data fields listed below for piece counting.
updated.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].

Values Explanation
RefPcs Shows the selected reference unit quantity.
PcsWgt Shows the reference unit weight.
n Shows the number of piece counts carried out in a series.
x Shows the average unit quantity of all piece counts in a series.
s Shows the standard deviation as an absolute value.
s.rel Shows the standard deviation as a percentage.
Sum Shows the unit quantity of all counts in a series.
>T+ Shows the number of piece counts outside the upper weight tolerance.
<T- Shows the number of piece counts outside the lower weight tolerance.
Min Shows the smallest measured unit quantity in a series of piece counts.
Max Shows the largest measured unit quantity in a series of piece counts.
Diff. Shows the difference between the smallest and largest unit quantity in a series of
piece counts.
Nominal This function key displays the nominal unit quantity.
+Tol This function key displays the entered tolerance for piece counting.
-Tol This function key displays the entered tolerance for piece counting.
Factory setting: PcsWgt activated.
10.1.4 Specifications for automatic weight entry

Navigation: [ ] > [Piececounting] > [ ] > Autom. WeightEntry
Here you define whether and under which conditions the balance should automatically enter stable weight val
ues in the statistics. This saves you the effort of tapping the [M+] function key. The value is printed automati
cally.
1 Press [ ].
Limit This value defines which limit must be exceeded for automatic User-defined
entry.
Delay time When the limit is exceeded, the Delay time is started, and when User-defined
it times out the value is captured and entered in the statistics or (displayed in seconds)
transferred over the interface.
10.1.5 Additional unit for piece counting

Navigation: [ ] > [Piececounting] > [ ] > Display Unit or Info Unit

The PCS unit (piece) is also available beside the known weighing units in the Display Unit and Info Unit menu
topics, provided that a reference unit weight has already been determined.
Note
You do not explicitly need to select the PCS unit for piece counting, since the display unit is always automati
cally switched to PCS when the reference unit weight is being determined. Afterwards, you can select the
desired unit again at any time, unless you have already saved a value to the memory for a series of piece
counts. In this case, switching between PCS and the other weighing units is only possible after deleting the
results.
1 Press [ ].
2 Tap the button next to Display Unit or Info Unit.
A selection window appears.
3 To change a setting, tap the corresponding button.
Factory setting: g (Grams) for Display Unit and Info Unit.
10.1.6 Specific protocol data for piece counting

Navigation: [ ] > [Piececounting] > [ ] > Protocol
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Note

gle result.
The header is printed automatically for piece counts when the first count is entered in the statistics by tapping
the [M+] function key.
Values Explanation
Max n Records the defined maximum number of piece counts in the series.
Nom.,+Tol,-Tol Records the defined nominal unit quantity and the defined plus and minus toler
ances.
Factory setting: Appl. Name, Date/Time, Balance Type and SNR are activated in this order.
Tap the [M+] function key to activate automatic printing of single values during a series of counts.
Values Explanation
ances.
RefPcs Records the selected reference unit quantity.
PcsWgt Records the defined reference unit weight.
NetPcs Records the measured net unit quantity.
Factory setting: ID1, Nom.,+Tol,-Tol, Net and NetPcs are activated in this order.
If a specific number of counts [Max n] is defined for a series of piece counts, the results protocol is automati
cally printed after the weight of the last count has been entered in the statistics.
Values Explanation
Max n Records the defined maximum number of piece counts in the series.
ances.
>Tol+,<Tol- Records the number of counts that are outside the tolerance range.
n Records the number of piece counts carried out in a series.
x Records the average unit quantity of all counts in a series.
s Records the standard deviation as an absolute value.
Note

s.rel Records the relative standard deviation within the series as a percentage.
The value is always recorded with a resolution of two decimal places.
Note
Min,Max,Diff Min = Records the smallest measured unit quantity of the current series.
Max = Records the largest measured unit quantity of the current series.
Diff. = Records the difference between the smallest and largest unit quantity of the
current series.
Sum Records the total value of all saved individual weighings.
SumPcs Records the total unit quantity of all saved individual counts.
Factory setting: n, x, s, s.rel, Min, Max, Diff., Sum, SumPcs, Signature and 3 Blank Lines activated.
10.1.7 Specific SmartSens and ErgoSens settings for piece counting

Navigation: [ ] > [Piececounting] > [ ] > Smart & ErgoSens
Additional settings are available for the SmartSens and ErgoSens sensors.
respective sensor.
1 Press [ ].
Menu structure
FixPcs | Result | M+ | OK | ID1 | ID2
| ID3 | ID4 | Header | 1/2d | 1/5d |
1/10d | 1/100d | 1/1000d
| ID3 | ID4 | Header | 1/2d | 1/5d |
1/10d | 1/100d | 1/1000d
| ID3 | ID4 | Header | 1/2d | 1/5d |
1/10d | 1/100d | 1/1000d | AntiSta
tic Kit
| ID3 | ID4 | Header | 1/2d | 1/5d |
1/10d | 1/100d | 1/1000d | AntiSta
tic Kit

Values Explanation
FixPcs Emulates the same function key. Determines the reference unit weight with a
defined, fixed number of pieces.
M+ Emulates the function key with the same name. Takes over the current value.
tivated, [Off].
10.2 Working with the Piece Counting application

Navigation: [ ] > [Piececounting]
This section describes how to work with the Piececounting application. Among other things, you can determine
a tare weight, change the resolution of the weighing result or work with identifiers.
10.2.1 Simple piece counting

Initial settings
To carry out a simple piece counting, you must activate at least the following three function keys:
FixPcs – Activate function keys.
VarPcs
PcsWgt
Also activate the data fields PcsWgt (Reference unit weight) and RefPcs (Reference unit quantity) so that the
defined values will be displayed.
Determining the reference
Place the desired number of reference units on the weighing pan. Using these reference units, the balance mea
sures the average piece weight. This serves as a basis for the piece counting.
If the number of reference units placed on the balance corresponds exactly to the number that is programmed
for the function key [FixPcs], tap it. As soon as the weighing result is stable, the measured average piece
weight is accepted as a reference. The average weight of the reference units (the number of decimal points
depends on the model) and the reference unit quantity appears in the data fields.
If a different number of reference units is placed on the balance, and it does not correspond to the function key
[FixPcs], e.g. 32 pieces, tap the function key [VarPcs] (variable unit quantity). It appears in the input field in
which the number of pieces is typed. After confirming the unit quantity, the balance determines the reference.
The average weight of the reference units and the reference unit quantity appear in the data fields.
If the piece weight is known, this can be entered directly. To do this, tap the function key [PcsWgt]. A data field
appears in which the piece weight is typed in the desired unit. Since the balance does not have to determine a
reference for this method, after confirming the piece weight, the result of the piece counting is displayed imme
diately (number of pieces currently placed on the balance). The entered reference unit weight and the reference
unit quantity "1" (since you have entered the weight of an individual part) appear in the data fields.

Performing the piece counting
The measured single value can be printed out with the [ ] key.
Note
If the weight of the piece on the balance is displayed instead of the unit quantity, tap the [PCS] unit. Tap the
desired weighing unit from the selection window.
1 Load the reference units on the weighing pan.
2 Tap, e.g. [FixPcs].
The measured average piece weight is saved as the reference.
3 Place the pieces to be counted on the balance and tap the [M+] function key.
When the result is stable (the dashes disappear), it is entered in the statistics.
4 Tap [Result].
7 Tap [CL Result] to end the counting series and delete the memory for the next series.
10.2.2 Totalizing and acquiring statistics from piece counts

Initial settings
In order for you to totalize and acquire statistics, you must activate at least the following three function keys:
Result
CL Result
We also recommend activating the following two function keys. They allow you to delete incorrect values [CL
Last] and to define the number of piece counts to be included in a series [Max n].
For optimal use of the statistics functions, a printer should be connected to the balance. If a printer is not con
nected, the four most important statistics information fields for your application should be activated (e.g. n, x,
Min and Max).

Procedure
If the number of piece counts for a series is specified, press the [Max n] function key and enter the number of
counts (1 to 999). The series is terminated automatically after the last count has been completed. The result
window is opened and the result protocol is printed. This function key is only active when no value is present in
the statistics. If you enter 0 (zero) for [Max n], the series does not have a defined limit and you can statistically
record a maximum of 999 piece counts.
the balance.
Alternatively you can use the tare memory or the automatic taring function. These functions are described in the
instructions for the Weighing application.
Determine the reference with the desired method. Fixed reference unit quantity, variable reference unit quantity or
entry of a known piece weight.
2 Tap, e.g. [VarPcs].
3 Enter the number of reference units and confirm with [OK].
4 Place the pieces to be counted on the balance and tap the [M+] function key.
When the result is stable (the dashes disappear), it is entered in the statistics.
5 Remove the pieces from the first count.
6 Place the pieces for the second count on the balance and tap the [M+] function key.
7 Tap [Result].
Note
An error message is displayed if you tap the [M+] function key but no weight change has occurred. This pre
vents you from accidentally acquiring the same result twice.
If the automatic weight entry function is activated, the [M+] key does not need to be pressed for the result to be
acquired. The value is automatically entered in the statistics.
If you have mistakenly saved an incorrect piece count result, you can use the [CL Last] function key to delete it.
It is only available if values are already present in the memory; otherwise the key is grayed out and cannot be
actuated. The key is deactivated after a result is deleted and is not activated again until the next result has been
entered in the statistics.

10.2.3 Counting to a nominal value
The Piececounting application provides additional functions that simplify counting to a defined nominal value.
You can use these functions for individual counts or for series counts with statistics. It is assumed that the refer
ence for the piece count has already been determined.
Initial settings
To enter the nominal value and the associated tolerance range, activate the function keys listed below. Also
activate the data fields with the same names so that the defined values will be displayed.
+Tolerance
-Tolerance
We also recommend activating the Abs/Diff function key. This allows the results display to be switched at any
time, between the amount already weighed and the remaining amount still to be weighed until the nominal val
ue is reached.
Abs/Diff – Function key activation.
Procedure
Note
The function keys for entering the nominal value and the tolerance range are deactivated if values are already
present in the statistics. In this case, you must clear the statistics with the [CL Last] function key before you
can define the nominal value and the tolerance range.
The [PCS] unit is only available if a reference unit weight has already been determined.
A selection of available units, including [PCS] (pieces) can be displayed by tapping the weighing unit.
Note
changed.
any unit, e.g. [PCS].
Note
Piece counts outside the tolerance range are specifically marked with >T+ or <T- when single values are
recorded.

is displayed.
10.2.4 Reference optimization
Reference optimization leads to more precise results for piece counting. With each reference optimization, the
average piece weight (reference) is recalculated. Since the newly placed parts enlarge the basis for the calcula
tion, the reference and the result of the piece count will be more precise.
Determine the reference with the desired method (fixed or variable reference unit quantity). Reference optimiza
tion can be carried out any number of times. The reference and the counting result will be more precise after
each optimization.
Note
Reference optimization is only possible if:
● The number of placed parts is greater than the reference unit quantity.
● The number of placed parts is not greater than twice the last saved reference unit quantity.
● Fixed reference unit quantity or variable reference unit quantity are used as a method for determining the
reference. Reference optimization is not possible when entering a known reference unit weight (function key
[PcsWgt]).
In the case of a series of piece counts, reference optimization is only possible before the result of the first count
is saved with the [M+] function key. The [RefOpt] function key is then grayed out and can no longer be
pressed, since changing the calculation basis (Reference unit weight) is not permitted during an ongoing
series.
To use reference optimization, activate the following function key.
RefOpt – Activate function key.

2 Tap, e.g. [FixPcs].
The measured average piece weight is saved as the reference.
3 Place the pieces to be counted on the balance and tap the [RefOpt] function key.
When the weight is stable (dashes disappear), the weighed quantity is used as the new reference quan
tity. The reference unit weight is recalculated on this basis.
After reference optimization, the [RefOpt] function key remains inactive until further pieces are placed on
the balance.
4 Place further pieces on the balance, tap the [RefOpt] function key.
The weighed quantity is used as the new reference quantity.
5 Tap [M+] to enter the result in the statistics.
6 Tap [Result].

10.2.5 Example protocol of a piece count with statistical values

Note
The values for x, s, Min, Max, Diff. and Sum are displayed in the current display unit; this does not necessari
ly have to be PCS (pieces).
Important information for the interpretation of recorded results
The x and s values are calculated results that are shown with higher resolution than the individual measured
values. The significance of the last decimal place cannot be assured with a relatively small measurement series
(fewer than 10 or so measured values) with small weight differences.
Example: Printout

---- Piececounting -----
25.Jul 2013 12:40
User Name User 4
Balance Type XPE204
WeighBridge SNR
1234567890
Nominal 110.00 PCS
+Tol 3 PCS
-Tol 1 PCS
Max n 3
1 110 PCS
NetPcs 110 PCS
RefPcs 10 PCS
PcsWgt 2.314 g
2 109 PCS
NetPcs 109 PCS
RefPcs 10 PCS
PcsWgt 2.314 g
3>T 114 PCS
NetPcs 114 PCS
RefPcs 10 PCS
PcsWgt 2.314 g
n 3
x 111.000 PCS
s 2.600 PCS
s.rel 2.34 %
Min 109 PCS
Max 114 PCS
Diff 5 PCS
Sum 333.00 PCS
SumPcs 333 PCS
>T+ 1
<T- 0
Signature
........................

11 Percent Weighing Application
Navigation: [ ] > [Percentweighing]
cation.
The Percentweighing application enables weighing to a predefined weight (100%) and identification of devia
tions from this nominal weight.
1 Press [ ].
2 Tap the [Percentweighing] icon in the selection window.
Some of the specific function keys and information fields for percent weighing are activated by default
(factory defaults).
11.1 Settings for percent weighing application

Navigation: [ ] > [Percentweighing] > [ ]
Several specific settings are available for percent weighing. You can use them to adapt the application to your
needs.
described below.
Unlike the Weighing application, only one custom unit can be specified. The MinWeigh feature is not avail
able.
Function Keys Defines the function keys for percent weighing to See Specific function key for percent
appear at the bottom of the display. weighing (page 177)
tions.
Info Field Defines the information fields to be displayed for See Specific information fields for
percent weighing. percent weighing (page 177)
Display Unit Defines the unit for result display. See Additional unit for percent weigh
ing (page 178)
Info Unit Defines an additional weighing unit. This is dis See Additional unit for percent weigh
played in the respective information field. ing (page 178)
Protocol Selects information to be displayed in the weighing See Specific protocol information for
protocols. percent weighing (page 178)
Smart & Programs both SmartSens sensors of the terminal. See Specific SmartSens and
ErgoSens Up to two external ErgoSens (optional) can be ErgoSens settings for percent weigh
assigned a function in this menu. ing (page 180)

11.1.1 Specific function key for percent weighing
Navigation: [ ] > [Percentweighing] > [ ] > Function Keys
This menu item can be used to activate the following specific function keys for percent weighing.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Set100% Defines the current weight as a reference (100%).
VarRef% Assigns the current weight a variable reference.

+Tol Defines the accuracy (tolerances) for percent weighing.
-Tol Defines the accuracy (tolerances) for percent weighing.
Factory setting: [Set100%] and [VarRef%] activated in this sequence.
11.1.2 Specific information fields for percent weighing

Navigation: [ ] > [Percentweighing] > [ ] > Info Field
This menu item contains the following information fields for percent weighing.
updated.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Percent Weighing Application 177

Values Explanation
Reference% Displays the reference weight in percent.
Reference Displays the absolute weight of the reference.
Factory setting: Reference% and Reference activated in this sequence.
11.1.3 Additional unit for percent weighing

Navigation: [ ] > [Percentweighing] > [ ] > Display Unit or Info Unit
The unit % (percent) is additionally displayed in the Display Unit and Info Unit menu items next to the known
weighing units. This assumes that a reference has already been determined.
Note
The unit % does not need to be explicitly selected for percent weighing as the unit is always switched automati
cally to % when determining the reference. The required unit can subsequently be selected as required.
1 Press [ ].
2 Tap the button next to Display Unit or Info Unit.
A selection window appears.
3 To change a setting, tap the corresponding button.
Factory setting: g (Grams) for Display Unit and Info Unit.
11.1.4 Specific protocol information for percent weighing

Navigation: [ ] > [Percentweighing] > [ ] > Protocol
sequence.
1 Press [ ].

Note
gle result.
The header is automatically printed if defined as part of the weighing protocol (in recording single values sub
menu).
Values Explanation
Ref%, Ref. Records the reference in percent and weight.
Nom.,+Tol,-Tol Records the defined nominal weight and determined plus/minus tolerances.
Printing takes place by pressing the [ ] key or automatically if the automatic print function is activated.
Values Explanation
Diff. Records the deviation from the nominal weight as a weight.
Diff. % Records the deviation from the nominal weight in percent.
Protocol footer
values).
The footer can be printed by tapping the [Footer] function key.

Values Explanation
Factory setting: Signature and 3 Blank Lines activated in this sequence.
11.1.5 Specific SmartSens and ErgoSens settings for percent weighing

Navigation: [ ] > [Percentweighing] > [ ] > Smart & ErgoSens
Additional settings for percent weighing are available for the SmartSens and ErgoSens sensors.
respective sensor.
1 Press [ ].
Menu structure
VarRef% | Set100% | ID1 | ID2 |
ID3 | ID4 | Header | Footer | PreTare
| 1/2d | 1/5d | 1/10d | 1/100d |
1/1000d
| 1/2d | 1/5d | 1/10d | 1/100d |
1/1000d
| 1/2d | 1/5d | 1/10d | 1/100d |
1/1000d | AntiStatic Kit
| 1/2d | 1/5d | 1/10d | 1/100d |
1/1000d | AntiStatic Kit
Values Explanation
VarRef% Emulates the function key with the same name. Assigns the current weight a vari
able reference.
Set100% Emulates the function key with the same name. Defines the current weight as a ref
erence (100%).

tivated, [Off].
11.2 Working with the percent weighing application

Navigation: [ ] > [Percentweighing]
This section describes working with the Percentweighing application. Among other things, you can determine
a tare weight, change the resolution of the weighing result or work with identifiers.
11.2.1 Simple percent weighing

Initial settings
To perform a percent weighing, the two following function keys must be activated.
VarRef% – Activate function keys.
Set100%
Determining the reference

Place the reference weight on the weighing pan. If the applied reference weight is to correspond to 100%, press
the [Set100%] function key. When the weighing result is stable, the determined weight is taken over as a refer
ence. The reference weight (100%) is shown in the result display and information field Reference%. The
absolute reference weight is displayed in the Reference information field.
If the applied weight is assigned a variable reference, press the [VarRef%] function key. Displayed is an input
field in which the percentage (e.g. 60%) is defined corresponding to the applied weight.
Performing a percent weighing
Note
If the weight of the product is to be displayed instead of the percentage, tap the unit [%]. Tap the required
weighing unit from the selection window.
1 Place the reference weight on the weighing pan.
2 Tap [Set100%].
When the result is stable (horizontal lines disappear), the determined weight is taken as a reference.
The reference weight (100%) is shown in the result display and information field Reference%.
The absolute reference weight is displayed in the Reference information field.
3 Place the product on the balance.
4 Press [ ] to print the percent weighing result.
5 Tap [Footer] to print the footer.
Percent weighing is complete.

11.2.2 Percent weighing to a nominal weight
The Percent application offers additional functions to facilitate weighing to a defined nominal weight. It is
assumed that the reference for percent weighing has already been determined.
Initial settings
To enter the nominal value and the associated tolerance range, activate the function keys listed below. Also
activate the data fields with the same names so that the defined values will be displayed.
+Tolerance
-Tolerance
Procedure
Note
Units are not converted automatically. If a value is entered in a unit, this value is maintained even if the unit is
changed.
1 Tap [Nominal].
2 Enter the required value, e.g. 130%.
A selection of available units, including [%] (percent) can be displayed by tapping the weighing unit.
Note
The unit [%] is only available after the reference has been determined.
4 Tap [+Tolerance] and/or [-Tolerance]
Both tolerances are set to 2.5% by default. Instead of a percentage, an absolute tolerance can also be
entered in any unit, e.g. [%].
Note
Percent weighings outside the tolerances are specifically marked with >T+ or <T- when recording single
values.
is displayed.
Products can be roughly weighed until the tolerance is reached and subsequently finely dosed up to the
nominal weight.
11.2.3 Sample protocol of a percent weighing


Example: Printout
---- Percentweighing ---

25.Jul 2013 13:51
User Name User 5
Reference% 100.00 %
Reference 27.05 g
Nominal 130 %
+Tol 2.50 %
-Tol 2.50 %
129.06 %
Diff.% -0.94 %
Signature
........................

12 Density Application
Navigation: [ ] > [Density]
This section contains information and setting options for practical working with the application.
The Density application is used for determining the density of solids and liquids as well as pasty substances.
Each sample can be assigned an identification and the integrated statistics function can be used for statistical
evaluation of measurements. Density determination is carried out based on Archimedes' principle according to
which a body immersed in a fluid undergoes an apparent loss in weight which is equal to the weight of the flu
id it displaces.
The hanger opening in the balance can be used for density determination. The optional density kit should be
used for determining the density of solids. This includes all necessary accessories and aids for convenient and
precise density determination. The density kit is supplied with separate instructions with a description of instal
lation and use. A sinker is additionally required for determining the density of liquids and is available from a
METTLER TOLEDO representative.
Alternatively, the Density application can also be used for determining the density of liquids using a pycnome
ter. Pycnometers are available from companies specializing in lab supplies.
A gamma sphere is required for determining the density of pasty substances. The names of suppliers can be
obtained from an authorized representative.
Note
Refer to the separate instructions supplied with the accessories. These contain useful information for working
with these aids and their maintenance and use.
1 Tap [ ].
2 Tap the [Density] icon in the selection window.
Some of the specific function keys and information fields for density determination are activated by
default (factory defaults).
The balance is ready for determining the density of solids using the auxiliary liquid, water.
12.1 Density application settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ]
Various specific settings are available for density determination which can be used for adapting applications to
suit specific requirements.
described below.
Method Defines the density determination method. See Selecting the density determina
tion method (page 185)
Aux. Liquid Defines the auxiliary liquid. See Selecting an auxiliary liquid
(page 185)

Statistics Activates/deactivates the statistics for the selected See Activation or deactivation of sta
method. tistics (page 185)
Result Output Defines how the result of the density determination see Specifications for calculation and
Format is calculated and displayed. result display (page 186)
Function Keys Defines the function keys for density determination See Specific function keys for density
to appear at the bottom of the display. determination (page 186)
Info Field Defines the information fields displayed for density See Specific information fields for
determination. density determination (page 187)
Protocol Selects information to be shown in the weighing See Specific protocol information for
protocols. density determination (page 188)
Smart & Programs both terminal SmartSens sensors. Up to See Specific SmartSens and
ErgoSens two external ErgoSens (optional) can be assigned a ErgoSens settings for density determi
function in this menu. nation (page 190)
12.1.1 Selecting the density determination method

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Method
This menu item can be used to define the density determination method.
Solid Determines the density of non-porous solids using See
an auxiliary liquid.
Aux. Liquid Determines the density of liquids using a sinker. See
Pasty Subst. Determines the density of pasty substances using a See
gamma sphere.
Pycnometer Determines the density of liquids using a pycnome See
ter.
Solid porous Determines the density of porous solids using an See
additional oil bath.
Factory setting: [Solid] activated.
12.1.2 Selecting an auxiliary liquid

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Aux. Liquid
This menu item can be used to define an auxiliary liquid. This setting is only used for determining the density of
solids.
Values Explanation
Water The density of distilled water at temperatures from 10.0°C to 30.0°C is stored in the
balance.
Ethanol The density of ethanol at temperatures from 10.0°C to 30.0°C is stored in the bal
ance.
Others Any auxiliary liquid whose density at the current temperature must be known.
Factory setting: [Water] activated.
12.1.3 Activation or deactivation of statistics

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Statistics
The balance can store specific statistics for each density determination method. When the statistics function is
activated, a request is made at the end of each density determination to include the result in the statistics. This
menu item can be used to activate or deactivate the statistics function.
Density Application 185

Note
To use the statistics, activate both [Start] and [Temp.AL] function keys.
Values Explanation
On Activates the statistics function.
Off Deactivates the statistics function.
12.1.4 Specifications for calculation and result display

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Result Output Format
This menu item can be used to define the number of decimal places and unit used for calculation and display
of the density determination result and also whether the air buoyancy is to be taken into account in calculation.
No. of decimal Defines the number of decimal places. 1 | 2 | 3* | 4 | 5
points The density determination result can be displayed and recorded
with 1 to 5 decimal places.
Compensation Defines the correction factor for force calibration. With* | Without |
With = the density determination result can be corrected by the With/Without
force calibration correction factor and mean air density.
Without = no correction takes place.
With/Without = the corrected and uncorrected result is displayed
and recorded.
Density Unit Defines the unit to be used for density determination. g/cm³* | kg/m³ | g/l
g/cm³ = grams per cm3.
kg/m³ = kilograms per mkg/m³.
g/l = grams per liter.
* Factory setting
12.1.5 Specific function keys for density determination

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Function Keys
This menu item can be used to activate the following specific function keys for density determination.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].

Start Starts density determination.
Density AL Defines the density of the auxiliary liquid.

Only required for determining the density of solids and if an auxil
iary liquid other than water or ethanol is used.
Temp.AL Entry of the auxiliary liquid temperature.
Only required if distilled water or ethanol is used. For other liq
uids, the density at the current temperature must always be
entered. For methods that do not require the use of an auxiliary
liquid, the key for entering the current ambient temperature can
be used. This is shown in the protocols.
Vol.Sinker Entry of the sinker volume (in cm3, max. 5 decimal places).
Only required for determining the density of liquids using a
sinker.
Vol.G. Sphere Entry of the gamma sphere volume (in cm3, max. 5 decimal
places).
Only required for determining the density of pasty substances
using a gamma sphere.
Vol.Pycno Entry of the pycnometer volume (in cm3, max. 5 decimal
places).
Only required for determining the density of liquids using a pyc
nometer.
Wgt. Pycno Entry of the pycnometer weight.
Only required for determining the density of liquids using a pyc
nometer.
Result Displays the statistics for the current density determination
method.
Note
This function key only needs to be activated if the statistics func
tion is also activated. If no results are available in the statistics,
the key is inactive and cannot be actuated.
CL Result Clears the statistics for the current density determination to start a
new series of measurements.
Factory setting: [Start] and [Temp.AL] activated in this sequence.
12.1.6 Specific information fields for density determination

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Info Field
This menu item provides the following information fields for density determination.

updated.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Values Explanation
Method Shows the selected density determination method.
Aux. Liquid Displays the selected auxiliary liquid (determination of the density of solids).
Temp.AL Displays the temperature of the auxiliary liquid (distilled water, ethanol) entered via
the function key with the same name.
Density AL Displays the density of the auxiliary liquid.
For water or ethanol, is automatically selected from the integrated density tables and
displayed. For other auxiliary liquids, the density entered via the function key with
the same name is displayed.
Vol.Sinker Displays the sinker volume (determination of the density of liquids using a sinker).
Vol.Gamma Displays the gamma sphere volume (determination of the density of pasty sub
stances using a gamma sphere).
Vol.Pycno Displays the pycnometer volume (determination of the density of liquids using a
pycnometer).
Wgt. Pycno Displays the pycnometer weight (determination of the density of liquids using a pyc
nometer).
Factory setting: [Method], [Aux. Liquid] and [Temp.AL] activated in this sequence.
12.1.7 Specific protocol information for density determination

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Protocol
sequence.
1 Press [ ].

Note
gle result.
Statistics Define the statistics to be recorded. See Section Recording statistics
The header is printed automatically when a single value protocol is output.
Values Explanation
Method Records the selected density determination method.
Aux. Liquid Records the selected auxiliary liquid (determination of the density of solids).
Density AL Records the density of the auxiliary liquid.
Entry via the function key with the same name. For water or ethanol, the value
selected from the integrated table is recorded.
Temp.AL Records the temperature of the auxiliary liquid (for water and ethanol) entered via
Vol.Sinker Records the sinker volume (determination of the density of liquids using a sinker)
entered via the function key with the same name.
Vol.Gamma Records the gamma sphere volume (determination of the density of pasty sub
stances using a gamma sphere) entered via the function key with the same name.
Vol.Pycno Records the pycnometer volume (determination of the density of liquids using a pyc
nometer) entered via the function key with the same name.
Wgt. Pycno Records the pycnometer weight (determination of the density of liquids using a pyc
Factory setting: Appl. Name activated.
Press [ ] to print a single value protocol (protocol of a single density determination).
Values Explanation

Density AL Records the density of the auxiliary liquid.
Entry via the function key with the same name. For water or ethanol, the value
selected from the integrated table is recorded.
Temp.AL Records the temperature of the auxiliary liquid (for water and ethanol) entered via
Vol.Sinker Records the sinker volume (determination of the density of liquids using a sinker)
entered via the function key with the same name.
Vol.Gamma Records the gamma sphere volume (determination of the density of pasty sub
stances using a gamma sphere) entered via the function key with the same name.
Vol.Pycno Records the pycnometer volume (determination of the density of liquids using a pyc
Wgt. Pycno Records the pycnometer weight (determination of the density of liquids using a pyc
Wgt. in Air Records the weight of the sample in air (determination of the density of solids).
Wgt. in Liquid Records the weight of the sample in the auxiliary liquid (determination of the density
of solids) or the weight of the sample substance displaced by the sinker or gamma
sphere.
Wgt. of content Records the weight of the sample in the pycnometer (determination of the density of
liquids using a pycnometer).
Vol.Probe Records the volume of the sample (calculated by the firmware).
Density Records the result of the current density determination.
Factory setting: Density and 3 Blank Lines activated in this sequence.
Recording statistics
Press [ ] to print a statistics protocol. Takes place when the statistics window is open.
Values Explanation
n, x, s, s. rel n = records the number of samples in the current series of measurements.
x = records the average density of all samples.
s = records the absolute standard deviation within the current series of measure
ments.
s.rel = records the relative standard deviation within the current series of measure
ments.
Min,Max,Diff Min = records the lowest determined density within a series of measurements.
Max = records the highest determined density within a series of measurements.
Diff. = records the difference between the highest and lowest density within a series
of measurements.
Factory setting: n, x, s, s. rel, Min,Max,Diff, Signature, Dash Line and 3 Blank Lines activated in this
sequence.
12.1.8 Specific SmartSens and ErgoSens settings for density determination

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Smart & ErgoSens
Additional density determination settings are available for SmartSens and ErgoSens sensors.
respective sensor.
1 Press [ ].

Menu structure
SmartSens left Off | Door | Print | Start | Result | OK See Parameter table
| ID1 | ID2 | ID3 | ID4 | 1/2d | 1/5d |
1/10d | 1/100d | 1/1000d
SmartSens right Off | Door | Print | Start | Result | OK
| ID1 | ID2 | ID3 | ID4 | 1/2d | 1/5d |
1/10d | 1/100d | 1/1000d
ErgoSens 1 (Aux1) Off | Door | Print | Start | Result | OK
| ID1 | ID2 | ID3 | ID4 | 1/2d | 1/5d |
1/10d | 1/100d | 1/1000d | AntiSta
tic Kit
ErgoSens 2 (Aux2) Off | Door | Print | Start | Result | OK
| ID1 | ID2 | ID3 | ID4 | 1/2d | 1/5d |
1/10d | 1/100d | 1/1000d | AntiSta
tic Kit
Values Explanation
Start Emulates the function key with the same name. Starts density determination.
tivated, [Off].
12.2 Working with the density application

Navigation: [ ] > [Density]
This section describes working with the Density application and the different density determination methods.
12.2.1 Determination of the density of non-porous solids

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Method > [Solid]
For the determination of the density of non-porous solids, the solid is first weighed in air and then in the auxil
iary liquid. The difference in weight results in the buoyancy from which the density is calculated by the
firmware.
Note
● The hanger opening for weighing below the balance can be used for this purpose.
● When working with the optional density kit, observe the information in the supplied instructions.
Select in the application-specific settings as Method [Solid]. Define the required auxiliary liquid, e.g. [Water].
If an auxiliary liquid other than water or ethanol is used, activate the [Density AL] function key and the informa
tion field with the same name. Enter the density of the auxiliary liquid at the current temperature by pressing the

[Density AL] function key (in g/cm³, max. 5 decimal places). This is required as density tables are stored in
the balance only for water and ethanol. The entered value is displayed in the information field with the same
name. The activated [Temp.AL] function key and information with the same name are not required for density
determination with an auxiliary liquid other than water and ethanol. This function key can be used to enter the
current ambient temperature. This is subsequently also printed on the protocols and shows the temperature at
which the density was determined.
Activate the appropriate function keys and information fields.
Start – Activate function keys.
Temp.AL
Density AL
The result of the density determination can be printed with the [ ] key. The result is stored up to completion of
the next density determination with the same method and can be printed again as required.
1 Tap [ ].
2 Under Method, tap the associated button.
A selection window with methods is displayed.
3 Tap [Solid].
4 Under Aux. Liquid, tap the associated button.
5 Tap, e.g. [Water].
6 Tap [Temp.AL].
7 Enter the value (10°C to 30°C) and confirm with [OK].
For water and ethanol, density tables for the temperature range 10°C to 30°C are stored in the balance.
8 Tap [Start].
The balance is automatically tared.
The balance requests that the solid is weighed in air.
9 Place the solid on the balance.
When working with the optional density kit, observe the information in the supplied instructions.
When working with the hanger opening, hang the solid on the hanging device.
The weight of the solid is displayed at the bottom left corner of the window.
10 Tap [OK] to enter the weight.
The weighing result is stored.
The balance requests that the solid is weighed in the auxiliary liquid.
The solid must be immersed at least 1 cm in the liquid and no air bubbles must be present in the container.
When working with the hanger opening, the container with the auxiliary liquid must be placed below the
hanging device.

The balance determines the density of the solid.
The result window with compensated and/or uncompensated value is displayed.
Density determination is complete.
12.2.2 Determination of the density of liquids using a sinker

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Method > [Liquid]
For the determination of the density of liquids, a sinker with a known volume is used. The sinker is initially tared
in air and then weighed in the liquid whose density is to be determined. The difference in weight results in the
buoyancy from which the density is calculated by the firmware.
Note
Select in the application-specific settings as Method [Liquid].

The activated [Temp.AL] function key and information field with the same name are not required for this density
determination method. This function key can be used to enter the current ambient temperature. This is subse
quently printed together with the protocols showing the temperature at which the density was determined.
Vol.Sinker
Temp.AL
1 Tap [ ].
3 Tap [Liquid].
4 Tap [Vol.Sinker].
5 Enter the sinker volume, e.g. 10.00000 cm3 and confirm with [OK].
6 Tap [Start].
The balance requests that the sinker is weighed in air.
7 Place the sinker on the balance and confirm with [OK].
When working with the hanger opening, hang the sinker on the hanging device.

The balance requests that the sinker is weighed in the liquid.
8 Pour the liquid into the beaker.
The sinker must be immersed at least 1 cm in the liquid and no air bubbles must be present in the contain
er.
When working with the hanger opening, place the container with the liquid below the hanging device.
The buoyancy of the sinker is displayed with a negative sign at the bottom left corner of the window.
The weighing result is stored.
The balance requests that the solid is weighed in the auxiliary liquid.
The sinker must be immersed at least 1 cm in the liquid and no air bubbles must be present in the contain
er.
When working with the hanger opening, place the container with the liquid below the hanging device.
The balance determines the density of the liquid.
12.2.3 Determination of the density of pasty substances using a gamma sphere

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Method > [Pasty Subst.]
For the determination of the density of pasty substances, a gamma sphere with a known volume is normally
used. The pasty substance is initially tared without gamma sphere and then weighed with gamma sphere.
Select in the application-specific settings as Method [Pasty Subst.].
Vol.Gamma
Temp.AL
1 Tap [ ].
3 Tap [Pasty Subst.].

4 Tap [Vol.Gamma].
5 Enter the gamma sphere volume, e.g. 10.00000 cm3 and confirm with [OK].
6 Tap [Start].
The balance requests that the sample is weighed.
7 Place the sample on the balance (without gamma sphere) and confirm with [OK].
The sample weight is displayed at the bottom left corner of the window.
The balance requests that the gamma sphere is immersed in the liquid.
8 Immerse the gamma sphere in the liquid.
The weight of the substance displaced by the gamma sphere is displayed at the bottom left corner of the
window.
The weight is stored.
The balance determines the density of the pasty substance.
12.2.4 Determination of the density of liquids using a pycnometer

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Method > [Pycnometer]
For the determination of the density of liquids, a pycnometer is frequently used, i.e. a glass beaker with a
known volume and weight. The liquid is filled into the pycnometer and weighed.
Select in the application-specific settings as Method [Pycnometer].
Wgt. Pycno
Vol.Pycno
Temp.AL
1 Tap [ ].

3 Tap [Pycnometer].
4 Tap [Wgt. Pycno].
5 Enter the pycnometer weight, e.g. 43.83 g and confirm with [OK].
6 Tap [Vol.Pycno].
7 Enter the pycnometer volume, e.g. 50.331 cm3 and confirm with [OK].
8 Tap [Start].
The balance requests that the filled pycnometer is placed on the balance.
The pycnometer weight is displayed with a negative sign at the bottom left corner of the window.
9 Place the filled pycnometer on the balance and confirm with [OK].
The net weight of the sample is displayed at the bottom left corner of the window.
The balance determines the density of the liquid.
12.2.5 Determination of the density of porous solids

Navigation: [ ] > [Density] > [ ] > Method > [Solid porous]
For the determination of the density of porous solids, the solid is initially weighed in air. In contrast to non-
porous solids, an additional oil bath is required to close the pores in the solid before being weighed in the aux
iliary liquid.
Note
Select in the application-specific settings as Method [Solid porous]. Define the required auxiliary liquid, e.g.
[Water].
If an auxiliary liquid other than water or ethanol is used, activate the [Density AL] function key and the informa
tion field with the same name. Enter the density of the auxiliary liquid at the current temperature by pressing the
[Density AL] function key (in g/cm³, max. 5 decimal places). This is required as density tables are stored in
the balance only for water and ethanol. The entered value is displayed in the information field with the same
name. The activated [Temp.AL] function key and information with the same name are not required for density
determination with an auxiliary liquid other than water and ethanol. This function key can be used to enter the
current ambient temperature. This is subsequently also printed on the protocols and shows the temperature at
which the density was determined.

Temp.AL
Density AL
1 Tap [ ].
3 Tap [Solid].
4 Under Aux. Liquid, tap the associated button.
5 Tap, e.g. [Water].
6 Tap [Temp.AL].
7 Enter the value (10°C to 30°C) and confirm with [OK].
For water and ethanol, density tables for the temperature range 10°C to 30°C are stored in the balance.
8 Tap [Start].
The balance requests that the solid is weighed in air.
When working with the hanger opening, hang the solid on the hanging device.
The balance requests that the solid is briefly immersed in the oil bath and placed on the balance again.
11 Immerse the solid in the oil bath.
12 Place the solid in the same position again.
The balance requests that the solid wetted with oil is immersed in the auxiliary liquid.
The solid must be immersed at least 1 cm in the liquid and no air bubbles must be present in the con
tainer.
When working with the hanger opening, the container with the auxiliary liquid must be placed below the
hanging device.

The balance determines the density of the solid.
12.2.6 Example protocol of a density determination

Note
The result remains stored up to completion of the next density determination. The result can be printed again by
pressing the [ ] key. This may be necessary if a second copy of a protocol is required or if the printer could
not be used due to a lack of paper.
Example: Printout
-------- Dichte --------

25.Jul 2013 14:51
User Name User 6
Method Solid
Liquid Water
Density AL
0.99800 g/cm3
Temperature 21.2 °C
Wgt. in Air 21.78 g
Wgt. in Liquid
16.90 g
Density 4.447 g/cm3
===============
Density uncomp.
4.451 g/cm3
===============
Signature
........................
12.3 Using density statistics

Statistics can be provided for each density determination method. Stored are all results (max. 651500) record
ed in the statistics during density determination.
Initial settings
The statistics can be used by activating the statistics function and the following function keys.
See Activation or deactivation of statistics (page 185).
Note
If there are no values in the statistics, the [Result] and [CL Result] function keys are inactive and cannot be
actuated.

Result – Activate function keys.
CL Result
Entry of values for statistics

If the statistics function is activated, a request is made at the end of each density determination to enter the
results in the statistics.
The statistics function is activated.
– Tap [Yes].
The results are entered in the statistics of the current method.
Copying of the results is confirmed on the display.
If the results are not to be entered in the statistics, press [No]. The results are retained until the next measure
ment, but are not copied to the statistics.
Statistics display and printing
The density determination method must be selected in order to display or print the associated statistics.
See Selecting the density determination method (page 185).
Displayed in the statistics window are the values selected for recording statistics. The statistics protocol can be
printed by pressing the [ ] key with the statistics window open.
Example: Printout
-------- Dichte --------

25.Jul 2013 14:55
User Name User 6
Method Solid
Liquid Water
With Compensation
n 5
x 5.5004 g/cm3
s 0.0942 g/cm3
s.rel 1.71 %
Without Compensation
n 5
x 5.5062 g/cm3
s 0.0944 g/cm3
s.rel 1.72 %
With Compensation
Min 5.423 g/cm3
Max 5.603 g/cm3
Diff. 0.180 g/cm3
Without Compensation
Min 5.429 g/cm3
Max 5.609 g/cm3
Diff. 0.180 g/cm3
Signature
........................

The density determination method is selected.
Values are present in the statistics.
1 Tap [Result].
The statistics window with compensated and/or uncompensated values is displayed.
Only displayed are the values selected for recording statistics.
2 Tap [ ].
The statistics protocol is printed.
Deleting statistics
To end a series of measurements, press the [CL Result] function key. This clears the associated statistics. For
security reasons, a request is displayed, which must be confirmed before the statistics are cleared.
Note
The [CL Result] function key clears the statistics of the currently selected density determination method. The
statistics of other methods are retained. Prior to clearing, it must be ensured that the density determination
method, the statistics of which are to be cleared, is selected.
The density determination method is selected.
Values are present in the statistics.
1 Tap [CL Result].
2 To clear the statistics, tap [Yes].
The statistics are cleared.
12.4 Formulae used to calculate density

The Density application is based on the following formulae.
12.4.1 Formulae for determining the density of solids

With compensation for air density Without compensation for air density
= Sample density
A = Weight of the sample in air

B = Weight of the sample in the auxiliary liquid
V = Sample volume
= Density of the auxiliary liquid

= Air density (0.0012 g/cm3)
= Balance correction factor (0.99985), takes into account the buoyancy of the adjustment weight
12.4.2 Formulae for determining the density of liquids and pasty substances

With compensation for air density Without compensation for air density
•P P
= +
V0 V0
= Density of liquid or pasty substance
P = Weight of displaced liquid or pasty substance

V0 = Sinker or gamma sphere volume
= Air density (0.0012 g/cm3)
= Balance correction factor (0.99985), takes into account the buoyancy of the adjustment weight
12.5 Density table for distilled water

12.6 Density table for ethanol

13 Differential Weighing Application
Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing]
The majority of application settings are saved under the active user profile. Each user can select specific set
tings for this application. It must be ensured that the required user profile is selected.
Important
The specific data for differential weighing (definition and designation of, e.g. series and samples) and the
results are stored in a database. This is irrespective of the user profile. There is only one database for all users.
For differential weighing, one or several samples are checked for weight variations. The first step consists of
determining the initial weight of the sample (initial weighing). Certain sample components are subsequently
removed or added. Processes, e.g. drying, centrifuging, filtering, incineration, evaporation and coating are also
possible options. After processing, the sample is weighed again (residual weighing). The balance subsequently
determines the difference between the two values.
Up to 99 series can be defined. Each series can consist of several samples (the balance can manage up to
500 samples in total). Each sample can be tared, initially weighed and residually weighed up to 3 times.
An automatic or manual procedure can also be defined for each series. With the automatic procedure, the user
is guided through all steps of differential weighing for all samples (taring, initial weighing, residual weighing).
With the manual procedure, the sample processing sequence can be selected by the user. Irrespective of the
selected procedure, the balance continuously stores the current status for each sample. This prevents processes
from being repeated by mistake. It is not possible to initially weigh the same sample twice for example.
1 Tap [ ].
2 Tap the [Differential weighing] icon in the selection window.
Some of the specific function keys and information fields for statistics are activated by default (factory
defaults).
13.1 Settings for differential weighing application

Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing] > [ ]
Various specific differential weighing settings are available to suit specific application requirements.
All function keys are inactive as there are no specific settings for series and samples. Only a single series is
predefined by default; however this does not contain any samples (Series 1 with 0 samples).
described below.
Series Defines new series, processes and deletes existing See Defining, editing, deleting and
series, selects a series for differential weighing. selecting series (page 209)
Differential Weighing Application 203

Function Keys Defines the function keys for differential weighing See Specific function keys for differ
shown at the bottom of the display. ential weighing (page 204)
tions.
Info Field Defines the information fields to be displayed for dif See Specific information fields for dif
ferential weighing. ferential weighing (page 205)
protocols. differential weighing (page 205)
Print key Defines whether the values of the selected sample See Behavior of the Print key
or the complete series is printed when the [ ] key (page 208)
is pressed.
Barcode Defines the settings for processing barcode data. See Specific setting for processing
barcode data (page 208)
13.1.1 Specific function keys for differential weighing

Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing] > [ ] > Function Keys
This menu item can be used to activate the following specific function keys for differential weighing.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Sample ID Defines a designation (max. 20 characters).
Each sample of the current series can be assigned a designation.
CL sample Clears all measured values of a sample and changes the sample
designation back to the standard text.
The sample itself remains in the series.
Series Selects the series.
Tare Tares the sample container in a separate operation.
T & wgh. in Initiates taring of the sample container with subsequent initial
weighing of the sample.

Initial weighing Initially weighs a sample in a separate operation.
Residual wgh Starts residual weighing of a sample.
Info Displays information relating to the current series (designations,

measured values, results).
No tare Performs differential weighings without tare.
This key should only be activated to measure a complete series
without tare.
Copy tare Copies the tare weight of the first sample and for all further sam
ples of the current series, the tare of which has not yet been
determined.
CL Value Clears the previously determined weight (tare, initial or residual
weight).
Factory setting: [T & wgh. in], [Residual wgh], [Series], [Info] und [CL Value] activated in this sequence.
13.1.2 Specific information fields for differential weighing

Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing] > [ ] > Info Field
This menu item contains the following information fields for differential weighing.
updated.
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Values Explanation
Series ID Displays the designation of the selected series.
Procedure Displays the procedure for the selected series (automatic or manual).
Number of samples Displays the number of samples of the selected series.
Factory setting: Series ID, [Procedure] and Number of samples activated in this sequence.
13.1.3 Specific protocol information for differential weighing

Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing] > [ ] > Protocol

sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Note
gle result.
Values Explanation
Series ID Records the series designation.
Values Explanation
Sample ID Records the sample designation.
Tare time Records the tare date and time.
Tare Records the tare weight.
Weighing in time Records the date and time of the initial weighing.

Weighing in Records the initial weight.
Time 1 res.wgh Records the date and time of the first residual weighing.
1.Residual wgh Records the net weight of the first residual weighing.
Time 2 res.wgh Records the date and time of the second residual weighing.
2.Residual wgh Records the net weight of the second residual weighing.
Time 3 res.wgh Records the date and time of the third residual weighing.
3.Residual wgh Records the net weight of the third residual weighing.
Factory setting: Sample ID, Tare, Weighing in and 1.Residual wgh activated in this sequence.
This submenu can be used to define the form in which the differential weighing results are printed.
The result protocol can be printed by pressing the [ ] key if the Print key has been configured for printing
series data.
The results are recorded in the selected display unit.
The formulae, on which the settings are based, can be found under - Formulae used for the calculation of differ
ential weighing results.
Values Explanation
Diff. Records the absolute difference in weight between initial weighing and residual
weighing.
Diff. % Records the difference between initial weighing and residual weighing as a percent
age of the initial weight.
Abs. % Records the residual weight as a percentage of the initial weight.
Atro AM Records the moisture content of the sample as a percentage of the dry weight (ATRO
Moisture Content).
Atro AD Records the wet weight of the sample as a percentage of the dry weight (ATRO Dry
Content).
Factory setting: Diff., Diff. %, Abs. % and Atro AM activated in this sequence.
Protocol footer
values).
Values Explanation
Factory setting: Signature and 3 Blank Lines activated in this sequence.
Number of decimal places
This submenu can be used to define the number of decimal places with which the differential weighing results
are recorded.
Note
This setting refers only to the differential weighing results calculated by the application. In contrast, weights
(tare, initial weighing, residual weighing) are always recorded in the maximum resolution of the respective bal
ance.
Values Explanation
1…5 Display the results in the protocol with the selected number of decimal places.
Factory setting: 3 activated.

13.1.4 Behavior of the Print key
Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing] > [ ] > Print key
This menu item can be used to define the data to be printed when the [ ] key is pressed.
1 Tap [ ].
2 Under Print key, tap the associated button.
3 Tap (e.g. Sample).
Sample Printing the sample.
When the [ ] key is pressed, a selection window displaying all samples of the
current series is displayed. Select the sample to print the data.
Series Printing data.
When the [ ] key is pressed, the data of all samples of the current series is print
ed.
Factory setting: [Sample] activated.
13.1.5 Specific setting for processing barcode data

Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing] > [ ] > Barcode
This menu item contains an additional setting for differential weighing. The scanned barcode is interpreted as
the sample identification. If the current series contains a sample with this ID, the associated sample is selected
and is directly available for the next process step. If the current series does not contain the sample ID, an
appropriate message is displayed.
Note
If a series contains several samples with identical ID, the first sample with an ID corresponding to the scanned
barcode is selected.
1 Tap [ ].
2 Under Barcode, tap the associated button.
3 Tap Sample ID.
Menu structure
Barcode Off | ID1 | ID2 | ID3 | ID4 | PreTare | See look-up table
Host | Open Input* | Sample ID
* Factory setting
Values Explanation
Sample ID Interprets the barcode as the sample identification.

13.2 Defining, editing, deleting and selecting series
Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing] > [ ] > Series
In order to perform a differential weighing, at least one series with minimum one sample must be defined.
Press the [ ] key and select the menu for the definition of series. There are options for creating a new series
as well as for editing and deleting existing series. Select the required series in the last menu item. These options
are described in the following sections.
Note
When the application is started, the balance checks that at least 1 series is present. If this is not the case, the
application automatically generates the series 1.
Application Diff.weighing is activated.
Function keys are selected and activated.
1 Tap [ ].
2 Under Series, tap the [Define] button.
13.2.1 Defining a new series

Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing] > [ ] > Series > [New]
This submenu can be used to define a new series.
1 Tap [ ].
2 Under Series, tap the [New] button.
Series editor window is displayed.
3 Under Designation, tap the associated button.
The series are consecutively numbered by default (series x).
5 Under Number of samples, tap the associated button.
6 Enter the number of samples and confirm with [OK].
7 Under Procedure, tap the associated button.
8 Tap, e.g. [Automatic].
9 Under Sample ID, tap the associated button.
10 Enter the sample.
The samples are consecutively numbered by default (sample x).
12 To exit the menu item, tap [C].

Values Explanation
Designation Defines the series designation (max 20 characters).
Number of samples Defines the number of samples of the series (max. 500 samples).
Note
The balance can manage a maximum of 500 samples in total. Available for each
series therefore is a maximum of 500 samples, minus the number already used. If
a value that exceeds the number of available samples is entered, an appropriate
error message is displayed (this can take some time).
Procedure Selects between an automatic or manual procedure.
Automatic = the user is guided through all steps of differential weighing (taring, ini
tial weighing, residual weighing).
Manual = the user can select the sample processing sequence.
Sample ID Defines the sample designation (max. 20 characters).
Note
If the function key with the same name is activated, the sample designations can be
directly changed.
13.2.2 Editing an existing series

Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing] > [ ] > Series > [Edit]
This submenu can be used to edit an existing series. After tapping Series [Edit], a selection window is dis
played. Select the series to be edited. The same options are available for editing as for the definition of a new
series.
Attention
All series are stored in a single database available to all users. Series created by other users can also be edit
ed. Series must be edited with due care and other application users should be consulted if necessary.
Note
The number of samples of a series can only be reduced to the extent that no samples for which measured val
ues are already available can be deleted. Example: If the number of samples of a series is reduced from 20 to
10 and measured values are already available for sample 15, the number of samples can only be reduced to
15. A further reduction is only possible after the measured values of the respective samples have been cleared
(in this example, the measured values of samples 11 – 15).
1 Tap [ ].
2 Under Series, tap the [Edit] button.
3 Tap a series.
Series editor window is displayed.
13.2.3 Deleting a series
Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing] > [ ] > Series > [CL Last]

This submenu can be used to delete an existing series. After tapping Series [CL Last], a selection window is
displayed. Select the series to be deleted. A request is displayed prior to deletion. If the request is confirmed
with the [Yes] key, the series with all recorded measured values and calculated results is deleted.
Attention
All series are stored in a single database available to all users. Series created by other users can also be delet
ed. Series must be deleted with due care and other application users should be consulted if necessary.
1 Tap [ ].
2 Under Series, tap the [CL Last] button.
3 Tap a series.
A confirmation window Do you really want to delete this serie? is displayed.
4 To delete the series confirm with [Yes].
The series is deleted.
13.2.4 Selecting a series for differential weighing

Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing] > [ ] > Series > [Selection]
This submenu can be used to select a series for differential weighing. After tapping Series [Selection], a selec
tion window is displayed. Select the required series. If the [Series] function key is activated, the series can be
directly selected by pressing the key.
Function key is activated.
1 Tap [ ].
2 Under Series, tap the [CL Last] button.
3 Tap a series.
A confirmation window Do you really want to delete this serie? is displayed.
4 To delete the series confirm with [Yes].
The series is deleted.
13.3 Working with the differential weighing application

Navigation: [ ] > [Differential weighing]
This section describes the procedure for working with the Differential weighing application and recording the
results.
13.3.1 The various differential weighing methods

There are three different working methods for differential weighing which are supported by the Differential
weighing application. These three working methods are described below.

Method 1 (with taring and initial weighing in a single cycle)
This is the simplest method as the tare weight of the sample container and the initial weight (net weight) of the
sample are determined in a single operation.
For this method, activate the [T & wgh. in] and [Residual wgh] function keys.
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

Taring and Treat sample Residual Print results
weighing in weighing
Sample 1
Sample 2
Sample n
(n = 1..500)
Method 2 (with separate taring and initial weighing)

With this method, the sample container weight (tare weight) and the initial weight (net weight) of the sample
are determined in separate operations. With this method, all weighing containers can initially be tared before all
weighings are performed in a second operation.
For this method, activate the [Tare], [Initial weighing] and [Residual wgh function keys].
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5

Taring Weighing in Treat sample Residual Print results
weighing
Sample 1
Sample 2
Sample n
(n = 1..500)
Method 3 (free working)

Whereas methods 1 and 2 progress from one sample to the next, method 3 allows free working. Taring, initial
weighing and residual weighing can be performed as single steps for each sample. Not all 3 steps need to be
performed for a specific sample before the next sample is processed. The following diagram is a free working
example:
For this method, activate the [Tare], [Initial weighing] and [Residual wgh function keys].

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
Taring Weighing in Treat sample Residual Print results
weighing
Sample 1
Sample 2
Sample 3
Sample 2
Sample 1
13.3.2 Initial settings
Depending on the working method, appropriate initial settings should be made.
Irrespective of the working method, the 2 following function keys must be activated for each differential weigh
ing. This selects the series and performs a residual weighing. The series can also be selected via the menu.
Series – Activate function keys.
Residual wgh
The following function keys must also be activated in order to:

● change the sample designation (also possible via the menu);
● display already existing measured values for the current series;
● clear the last determined value.
ID – Activate function keys.
Info
CL Value
When working with method 1, the following function key must also be activated.
T & wgh. in – Activate function key.
When working with method 2 or method 3, the following function keys must also be activated.
Tare – Activate function keys.
Initial weighing

The following function keys must be activated for specific cases. This enables the first tare weight to be copied
to all further samples and differential weighing of a series without tare.
Copy tare – Activate function keys.
No tare
13.3.3 Differential weighing with automatic procedure

In this description, it is assumed that the automatic procedure has been selected for the series to be processed.
The automatic procedure guides the user through methods 1 or 2. The automatic procedure can be left at any
time and a change to a manual procedure made. A change from a manual to an automatic procedure is also
possible at any time.
Preparatory work
The currently active series is displayed in the Series ID information field. Another series can be processed by
tapping the [Series] function key and selecting the required series. To avoid operating errors, only those func
tion keys are active that are available for the next working step. The other keys are grayed and not accessible.
A standard sample designation can be changed by tapping the Sample ID function key if the change has not
already been made in the definition of the series. The required designation must be entered for each sample of
a series. The selected designations are also shown in the protocols.
The current differential weighing result can be printed with the [ ] key. Depending on the settings, either the
selected sample or complete series is recorded. A selection window is displayed prior to printing. Select the
sample for which values are to be recorded.
Taring and initial weighing of samples
Taring and initial weighing can be carried out in a single operation with the [T & wgh. in] function key. Taring
and initial weighing can be separated by defining a specific [Tare] and [Initial weighing] function key.
The arrow keys can be used to page between the previous and next sample.
Note
Taring or initial weighing can be interrupted at any time; the previously determined weights remained stored.
When the [T & wgh. in] function key is pressed again, the balance automatically displays the first sample for
which no tare or initial weight is available.
The automatic procedure is activated.
1 Tap [T & wgh. in].
The balance displays the first sample of the series for which no tare and initial weight is available.
The balance requests that the weighing container (tare weight) for the first sample is placed on the bal
ance.
3 Place the sample on the balance and confirm with [OK].
The balance determines the weight.
The balance requests initial weighing.
4 Place the sample in the weighing container and confirm with [OK].
The balance requests that the sample is removed.

5 Remove the sample container with the sample and confirm with [OK].
Initial weighing of the first sample of the series is complete.
The balance subsequently automatically starts the above described taring and initial weighing of all fur
ther samples of the series.
The balance displays the next sample of the series for which no tare and initial weight are available.
The balance requests that the weighing container (tare weight) for the sample is placed on the balance.
The balance confirms that taring and initial weighing has been carried out for all samples of the series.
The balance is ready for residual weighing.
Residual weighing of samples

Each sample can be residually weighed up to 3 times (e.g. for samples where components are removed or
added in several working steps). A window is displayed where residual weighing can be selected. Since no
residual weighing has been carried out in the following example, only the first residual weighing is currently
available.
The balance displays the first sample of the series for which no corresponding residual weight is available.
Another sample can be residually weighed by tapping one of the arrow keys. Paging can take place between
the previous and next sample.
A further residual weighing can be carried out by tapping the [Residual wgh] function key. The required residu
al weighing can be selected from the displayed list. A maximum of 3 residual weighings per sample can be
made.
Note
Each residual weighing can be interrupted at any time; the previously determined weights remain stored. The
balance automatically displays the first sample for which no residual weight is available when the [Residual
wgh] function key is subsequently tapped again.
The automatic procedure is activated.
1 Tap [Residual wgh].
2 Tap the [1.Residual wgh] button.
The balance displays the first residual weighing for which no residual weight is available.
The balance requests that the residual weight for the first sample is placed on the balance.
4 Place the residual weight on the balance and confirm with [OK].
The balance determines the residual weight.
5 Remove the sample and confirm with [OK].
Residual weighing of the first sample of the series is complete.

The balance subsequently automatically starts the above described operation for residual weighing of all
further samples of the series.
The balance displays the next sample of the series for which no residual weight is available.
The balance requests that the residual weight for the sample is placed on the balance.
The balance confirms that residual weighing has been carried out for all samples of the series.
Differential weighing is complete.
Displaying differential weighing results

The differential weighing results can be displayed at any time with the [Info] function key. The results for the
first sample are displayed. The results and further samples can be displayed at the bottom right of the window
by tapping one of the arrow keys. If the results of a sample include several windows, selection can be made
between the individual result windows with the scroll keys at the bottom left corner of the window.
Note
If several residual weighings have been carried out, these are displayed as NR 2 or NR 3. The results are also
displayed with the corresponding numbers, e.g. Diff. 1.
Values Explanation
T Records the tare weight of the sample.
NE Records the initial weight.
NR 1 Records the net weight of the first residual weighing.
Diff. 1 Records the absolute difference in weight between initial weighing and the first resid
ual weighing of the sample.
Diff. % 1 Records the difference between initial weighing and residual weighing as a percent
Abs. % 1 Records the residual weight as a percentage of the initial weight.
Atro AM 1 Records the moisture content of the sample as a percentage of the dry weight.
Atro AD 1 Records the wet weight of the sample as a percentage of the dry weight.
13.3.4 Differential weighing with manual sequence

Differential weighing with a manual sequence differs from the automatic sequence in that the sample process
ing sequence can be defined by the user.
When differential weighing is started with the [T & wgh. in] function key, a selection window is initially dis
played. Select the sample for taring and weighing.
In contrast to the automatic sequence, the application does not automatically return to the first sample, the val
ue of which is not yet available. The sample to be processed must be selected by the user. The sequence after
taring and initial weighing of the first sample is ended and not automatically restarted. Further samples can
now either be tared and initially weighed or residual weighing carried out for the first sample with the [Residual
wgh] function key. The sample selection window is also displayed for residual weighing.

Note
The sample selection window only displays the samples for which the appropriate operation has not yet been
carried out.
Preparatory work
The currently active series is displayed in the Series ID information field. Another series can be processed by
tapping the [Series] function key and selecting the required series. To avoid operating errors, only those func
tion keys are active that are available for the next working step. The other keys are grayed and not accessible.
A standard sample designation can be changed by tapping the Sample ID function key if the change has not
already been made in the definition of the series. The required designation must be entered for each sample of
a series. The selected designations are also shown in the protocols.
Taring and initial weighing of samples
Taring and initial weighing can be carried out in a single operation with the [T & wgh. in] function key. Taring
and initial weighing can be separated by defining a specific [Tare] and [Initial weighing] function key.
The arrow keys can be used to page between the previous and next sample.
2 Tap the sample to be processed.
The balance requests that the weighing container (tare weight) for the first sample is placed on the bal
ance.
Initial weighing of the first sample of the series is complete.
The balance requests that the weighing container (tare weight) for the sample is placed on the balance.

Taring and initial weighing is complete.
The balance is ready for residual weighing.
Residual weighing of samples

Each sample can be residually weighed up to 3 times (e.g. for samples where components are removed or
added in several working steps). A window is displayed where residual weighing can be selected. Since no
residual weighing has been carried out in the following example, only the first residual weighing is currently
available.
The balance displays the first sample of the series for which no corresponding residual weight is available.
Another sample can be residually weighed by tapping one of the arrow keys. Paging can take place between
the previous and next sample.
A further residual weighing can be carried out by tapping the [Residual wgh] function key. The required residu
al weighing can be selected from the displayed list. A maximum of 3 residual weighings per sample can be
made.
The balance requests that the residual weight for the first sample is placed on the balance.
4 Place the residual weight on the balance and confirm with [OK].
Residual weighing of the first sample of the series is complete.
The balance requests that the residual weight for the sample is placed on the balance.
Residual weighing is complete.
Differential weighing is complete.
Displaying differential weighing results

The differential weighing results can be displayed at any time with the [Info] function key. The results for the
first sample are displayed. The results and further samples can be displayed at the bottom right of the window
by tapping one of the arrow keys. If the results of a sample include several windows, selection can be made
between the individual result windows with the scroll keys at the bottom left corner of the window.
Note
If several residual weighings have been carried out, these are displayed as NR 2 or NR 3. The results are also
displayed with the corresponding numbers, e.g. Diff. 1.

Values Explanation
T Records the tare weight of the sample.
NE Records the initial weight.
NR 1 Records the net weight of the first residual weighing.
Diff. 1 Records the absolute difference in weight between initial weighing and the first resid
ual weighing of the sample.
Diff. % 1 Records the difference between initial weighing and residual weighing as a percent
Abs. % 1 Records the residual weight as a percentage of the initial weight.
Atro AM 1 Records the moisture content of the sample as a percentage of the dry weight.
Atro AD 1 Records the wet weight of the sample as a percentage of the dry weight.
13.3.5 Example of a differential weighing protocol

Example: Printout
- Differential weighing-
25.Jul 2013 15:49
Sample ID M414/1
T 6.7125 g
NE 17.0930 g
NR 1 15.6778 g
Diff. 1 -1.4152 g
Diff. % 1 -8.279 %
Abs. % 1 91.721 %
Atro AM 1 -9.027 %
Signature
........................
13.3.6 Further options
Further options for the Differential weighing application are described in this section.
Clearing a single value
If an error is noticed after determining a weight (tare, initial weighing, residual weighing), the last determined
value can be cleared with the [CL Value] function key. However, this is only possible if no menu has been
selected and the application has not been left. After changing a sample or series, the last determined value can
no longer be cleared.
1 Tap the [CL Value] function key.
A confirmation window Are you sure you want to clear this entry? is displayed.
2 To clear the value, tap [Yes].
The value is cleared.

Entry cleared window is displayed.
The value is cleared.
Clearing all values of a sample

If an error is made during differential weighing, all measured values of a single sample can be cleared. To clear
the values of a sample, the [CL sample] function key must be activated.
Attention
All series and samples are stored in a single database available to all users. The series and samples defined
by other users can be cleared. Series and samples must be cleared with due care and other application users
consulted if necessary.
1 Tap the [CL sample] function key.
2 Tap on the sample to be cleared.
A confirmation window Are you sure you want to clear all entries of this sample? is displayed.
3 To clear values, tap [Yes].
Values are cleared.
Sample cleared window is displayed.
Values are cleared.
Copy tare
The tare weight of the first sample can be copied for all further samples of the series for which no tare weight is
available with the [Copy tare] function key (existing tare weights are retained!). This can save time if the same
tare container is used for all samples.
Note
The function key is inactive as long as no tare weight has been determined for the first sample or if samples of
the series already have a tare weight.
Tare weight for sample is copied.
1 Tap the [Copy tare] function key.
A confirmation window Are you sure you want to copy the first tare weight to all free samples? is
displayed.
2 To copy the tare weight, tap [Yes].
Tare weight is copied.
Copy tare weight done window is displayed.
Tare weight is copied.
Differential weighing without tare

For specific applications where no tare containers are used (e.g. filter weighings), the tare can be suppressed
for the complete series. This saves time. To process a series without tare, the [No tare] function key must be
activated.

If tare is suppressed, this applies to all samples of the series for which no tare weight is available. Existing tare
weights are retained. All not yet available tare weights are set to zero. If a tare weight is nonetheless determined
for a specific sample of this series, all measured values of the respective sample must initially be cleared.
1 Tap the [No tare] function key.
A confirmation window Are you sure you do not need a tare for this series? is displayed.
2 Confirm with [Yes].
Tare weight is cleared.
No tare function done window is displayed.
Tare weight is cleared.
13.4 Formulae used for the calculation of differential weighing results

Diff. Residual weight – Initial weight
Diff. % (Residual weight – Initial weight) • 100%

Initial weight
Abs. % Residual weight • 100%

Initial weight
Atro AM [0 … 1000 %] - [Initial weight (wet weight) – Residual weight (dry weight)] • 100%
Residual weight (dry weight)
Atro AD Initial weight (wet weight) • 100%

[110 … 1000 %] Residual weight (dry weight)

14 Pipette Check Application
Navigation: [ ] > [Pipette Check]
This application requires the use of the optional accessory EasyScan™.

Terms
Since pipette checks are subject to inaccuracy, Sys. error E and Random Error s can occur time and again.
Sys. error E is a deviation between the nominal and mean value of measured test values.
Random Error sis a measure for the variation of determined volume values, i.e. denotes the relative standard
deviation.
Random errors can be small if measured values are close together, however systematic errors can be large if
the calculated mean value is far from the nominal value. This can also be the reverse. Ideally both measure
ment errors should be as small as possible.
Options
The pipette check application offers various options:
Pipette check
When a configured pipette is held in front of EasyScan™, the application checks the calibration and Quick-
Check dates and displays the result.
Quick-Check
Quality management systems conforming to standards such as ISO 9000, GLP or GMP require regular testing
of volumetric measuring devices. Quick-Check checks the accuracy of pipettes.
Quick-Check allows the accuracy of pipettes of any manufacturer with a Mettler-Toledo RFID tag to be checked.
Training
With this option, pipetting can be practiced or a system test performed. Before attempting to pipette with sensi
tive or expensive liquids, it may be necessary to check whether the required accuracy with a specific pipette can
be achieved on a specific balance. How to perform a system test. The training option can also be used for per
forming such "system tests".
Training can be performed with pipettes of any manufacturer. An RFID tag is not required as it is not supported
by the balance using the training option.
Pipette configuration
Before using the RFID tag for the first time, the configuration data must be entered. It may also be necessary to
adapt data to an already configured pipette (if, e.g. the pipette was calibrated, but the provider had not entered
the next calibration date).
Other functions
The pipette check application offers no pipette calibration functions. If calibration is required after checking, con
tact the pipette manufacturer.
For the Quick-Check and Training options, we recommend the use of a precision thermometer, barometer,
hygrometer and moisture trap.
1 Tap [ ].
2 Tap the [Pipette Check] icon in the selection window.
Some of the specific function keys and protocol information for the pipette check are activated by default
(factory defaults).

The balance is ready for the pipette check.
14.1 Pipette check application settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Pipette Check] > [ ]
Different specific pipette check settings are available, which can be used to adapt the application to suit specific
requirements.
Most of the settings are the same as the Weighing application. Only the pipette check specific settings are
described below.
QuickCheck Defines the behavior of Quick-Check. see Specific Quick-Check option set
Options tings (page 223)
Training Options Defines the training behavior. see Specific training option settings
(page 223)
RFID Recogni Defines the behavior of the RFID recognition beep. see Specific RFID recognition beep
tion Beep settings (page 224)
Function Keys Defines the function keys for the pipette check to See Specific pipette check applica
appear at the bottom of the display. tion function keys (page 224)
tions.
QuickCheck Pro Selects information to be shown in the Quick-Check see Specific Quick-Check protocol
tocol protocols. information (page 224)
Training Proto Selects information to be shown in the training pro see Specific training protocol infor
col tocols. mation (page 226)
14.1.1 Specific Quick-Check option settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Pipette Check] > [ ] > Pipette Check Options > [Define]
This menu can be used to define the behavior of Quick-Check.
Stabilization Defines the stabilization time in seconds (numerical entry). 3 … 100
time (5)*
Measurement Activates/deactivates the beep at the end of measurement. Off | On*
end beep
Auto start next Activates/deactivates automatic start of pipetting detection. Off | On*
sample Off : To start pipetting the next sample, confirm the result with
[OK].
* Factory setting
14.1.2 Specific training option settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Pipette Check] > [ ] > Training Protocol
Stabilization Defines the stabilization time in seconds (numerical entry). 3 … 100
time (5)*
No. of measure Defines the number of measurements for training (numerical 1 … 100
ments entry). (5)*
Pipette Check Application 223

Training liquid Defines the liquid used for training. Water* | Others
Measurement Activates/deactivates the beep at the end of measurement. Off | On*
end beep
Auto start next Activates/deactivates automatic start of pipetting detection. Off | On*
sample Off : To start pipetting the next sample, confirm the result with
[OK].
* Factory setting
14.1.3 Specific RFID recognition beep settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Pipette Check] > [ ] > RFID recognition beep
RFID Recogni Activates/deactivates the RFID recognition beep. Off | On*
tion Beep The beep sounds when the RFID reader has scanned the RFID tag
data.
* Factory setting
14.1.4 Specific pipette check application function keys

Navigation: [ ] > [Pipette Check] > [ ] > Function Keys
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
Training Starts training.
Setup Starts setup.
HowTo Display pipetting instructions.
14.1.5 Specific Quick-Check protocol information

Navigation: [ ] > [Pipette Check] > [ ] > QuickCheck Protocol > [Define]

sequence.
Single value Defines the information to be recorded for each indi See Section Recording single values
vidually tested volume.
Values Explanation
cannot be changed.
Pipette model The pipette type is printed.
Pipette SNR Prints the pipette serial number.
Nominal vol. Records the nominal volume of the pipette.
No. of measurements Records the number of measurements.
Env. data Records the air pressure, air temperature, water temperature and humidity.
Conv. factor Z Records the conversion factor Z.
Overall result Records whether Quick-Check was passed or failed.
Factory setting: Appl. Name, Date/Time, Pipette SNR and Pipette model activated in this sequence.
Recording single values (values for each check volume)
Values Explanation
Check vol. Records the check volume.
Limit Records the maximum permissible check volume system error and random error
(tolerance limits).
Meas. details Records details of the measurement (number and calculated volume of each sam
ple).

Statistics Records:
● average sample volume
● check volume systematic error [µl] und [%]
● check volume random error [µl] und [%]
● calculated measurement uncertainty
Result Records the volume result (passed/failed).

Factory setting: Check vol. and Result activated in this sequence.
Protocol footer
Values Explanation
Overall result Records whether Quick-Check was passed or failed.
Factory setting: Overall result, Signature and 3 Blank Lines activated in this sequence.
14.1.6 Specific training protocol information

Navigation: [ ] > [Pipette Check] > [ ] > Training Protocol > [Define]
Values Explanation
cannot be changed.
Liquid name The name of the liquid is printed.
Env. data If Training liquid: Water, the air pressure, air temperature, water temperature and
humidity are recorded.
If Training liquid: Others, the density of the used liquid is recorded.
Conv. factor Z If Training liquid: Water, the conversion factor Z is recorded.
Factory setting: Appl. Name, Date/Time and Liquid name activated in this sequence.
Recording single values (values for each check volume)
Values Explanation
No. of measurements Records the number of measurements.
Meas. details Records details of the measurement (number and calculated volume of each sam
ple).
Average vol. x Records the average sample volume.
Standard dev. Records the standard deviation of measurements.
Factory setting: No. of measurements, Average vol. x and Standard dev. activated in this sequence.
14.2 Working with the pipette check application

This section describes working with the Pipette Check application. It is assumed that the Pipette Check appli
cation is selected and the application-specific settings have been made. If an evaporation trap is available, it
should be installed. A precision thermometer, barometer and a hygrometer, if required, should be available.

Important
Test liquid, sample container, pipette and pipette tip should be acclimatized.
This application requires the use of the optional accessory EasyScan™.
14.2.1 Pipette check
This section describes the procedure for checking pipettes with RFID tag.
SmartScan™ is connected and configured.
The pipette has an RFID tag.
1 Hold the pipette in front of EasyScan™.
EasyScan™ scans the data on the RFID tag and checks the calibration and Quick-Check dates.
A message is displayed requesting whether any actions are required.
2 If no actions are required, confirm with [OK].
The check is complete.
14.2.2 Carrying out a Quick-Check

Shown below is the procedure for carrying out a Quick-Check on pipettes with RFID tag.
Measurement steps
● Pipette as directed by the [HowTo] function key.
● Confirm with [OK].
● The balance performs a stabilization countdown.
● If activated, a beep sounds on completion of the measurement.
Carrying out a Quick-Check

EasyScan™ scans and checks the data on the RFID tag.
If the calibration date is due, this is displayed.
If the date for the Quick-Check is due, start the Quick-Check.
2 Press [Check].
The balance starts the Quick-Check.
A window with ambient data is displayed.
3 Change the data if necessary and confirm with [OK]. (Once changed, the data is retained for subsequent
Quick-Checks).
4 Place the water container on the weighing pan and confirm with [OK].
The balance displays the Quick-Check window.
5 Carry out the measurements for the first volume.
- If a measurement is carried out incorrectly, the last measurement can be cancelled or repeated 3 times per
volume.
- When Auto start next sample is active, start the next measurement directly with pipetting.
If Auto start next sample is not active, press [OK].

When the measurements for a volume are complete, the balance displays an appropriate message.
6 Tap [Continue] to continue with the next volume.
The balance displays the result of the completed volume.
The balance requests that the pipette is adjusted to the new volume and the next cycle started. Starting
the cycle sets the balance to 0.
Carry out the measurements as described.
7 When the measurements for the last volume are complete, the balance displays the overall statistics.
8 The test result can be printed by pressing [ ].
9 If the Quick-Check is PASSED, hold the pipette in front of EasyScan™.
The date of the next Quick-Check is written to the RFID tag.
Quick-Check is complete.
Note
Only the date of the next Quick-Check is written to the RFID tag. No Quick-Check results are recorded. The test
results can be printed out at the end of the test.
14.2.3 Training
This section describes the training procedure. The training option can be used for pipette training or preparing
for a complex or critical pipetting task.
Measurement steps
● Pipette as directed by the [HowTo] function key.
● Confirm with [OK].
● The balance performs a stabilization countdown.
● If activated, a beep sounds on completion of the measurement.
Training
1 Tap [Training].
A window with test volume is displayed.
2 Change the data if necessary and confirm with [OK].
A window with ambient data is displayed.
3 Change the data if necessary and confirm with [OK].
4 Place the liquid container on the weighing pan and confirm with [OK].
A window with instructions is displayed.
5 Carried out the defined number of measurements.
- If a measurement is carried out incorrectly, the last measurement can be cancelled or repeated any num
ber of times.
- When Auto start next sample is active, start the next measurement directly with pipetting.
- If Auto start next sample is not active, press [OK].
6 The series of measurements is completed when the defined number is reached No. of measurements. To
actively end the series of measurements, tap [Finish].
The balance displays the final result.
7 The test result can be printed by pressing [ ].
Training is complete.

14.2.4 Pipette configuration
14.2.4.1 Scanning a new pipette with RFID tag

This section describes the setting options for a new pipette. New RFID tags do not contain any data. Before the
RFID tag can be used, the required data must be entered.
The RFID tag of the pipette is empty.
The balance detects that the RFID tag is empty and opens the data input window.
2 Enter the data.
3 Confirm data entry with [OK].
The balance requests that the RFID pipette is held in front of EasyScan™.
The data is written to the RFID tag.
The balance displays a message to confirm that the data has been successfully written to the tag.
The following data can be edited:
Pipette SNR Pipette serial number. Alphanumeric, max.
15 characters*
Pipette model Type of pipette. Alphanumeric, max. 15
characters*
Nominal vol. Nominal pipette volume in microliters [µl]. Value*
(0)
Comment field: Defines the free field name. Alphanumeric, max.
Name 10 characters*
Comment field: Defines the free field content. Alphanumeric, max.
Content 15 characters
Next calibration Defines the next calibration date. Date*
(Date plus 1 year)
Next Defines the next Quick-Check date. Date*
QuickCheck (Date)
ISO class Selects the pipette type (Single Channel or Multi Channel). Selection field*
(Single channel)
Evaporation trap Defines whether an evaporation trap is required. Selection field*
(No)
No. of measure Defines the number of measurements for Quick-Check (valid for Value*
ments all volumes). (4)
Check intervall Defines the Quick-Check interval (entry in days Value*
(90)
Volume 1 Defines the Quick-Check check volume 1 (percentage of the Value*
nominal volume). (10)

Sys. err. vol. 1 Maximum permissible systematic error (tolerance limit) for Value*
... Quick-Check check volumes 1 ... 3 (percentage of nominal vol (0)
Sys. err. vol. 3 ume).
Rand. err. vol. 1 Maximum permissible random error (tolerance limit) for Quick- Value*
... Check check volumes 1 ... 3 (percentage of nominal volume). (0)
Rand. err. vol. 3
* Required field ( ) application default values
Default values
The data of the last read or written pipette is displayed as default values. If no pipette was read or written since
the start of the application, the application above default values are displayed.
These default values allow, e.g. a reference pipette to be used for the configuration of a new pipette.
1 Hold the reference pipette in front of EasyScan™.
EasyScan™ reads the data and stores the default values.
2 Hold the pipette with empty RFID tag in front of EasyScan™.
A data input window with the reference pipette default values is opened.
Check volume for Quick-Check
The Quick-Check can be carried out with 1 to 3 check volumes. A check volume of 0% means that this check
volume is not used.
14.2.4.2 Editing pipette data

This section describes the procedure for editing the data of an RFID written pipette.
The pipette has an RFID tag.
1 Tap [Setup].
EasyScan™ reads the data from the RFID-day and opens the data input window.
3 Change the data in the respective data field.
4 Confirm the changes with [OK].
The data is written to the RFID tag.
The balance displays a confirmation message.
The following data can be edited:
See Scanning a new pipette with RFID tag (page 229).
14.2.5 Example protocol of a Quick-Check

The feasibility of a protocol depends on the selected protocol settings.
Example: Printout

---- METTLER TOLEDO ----
---- Pipette Check------
25.Jul 2013 15:13
Balance type XPE204
SNR 12345678
Pipette model ABC4711
Pipette SNR 87654321
Nominal vol. 100 µl
No. of measurements 4
Air press. 1013.0 hPa
Air temp. 20.0 C
Water temp. 20.0 C
Humidity 50.0 %
Con. factor Z 0.001003
Overall result FAILED
Check vol. 10 µl
Error limit %E 1.0 %

Error limit %s 1.0 %
1: 10.23 µl
2: 10.04 µl
3: 9.98 µl
4: 10.19 µl
Average vol. x
10.11 µl
Sys.error E 0.11 µl
Sys. error %E 1.1 %
Random error s 0.11 µl
Random error %s 1.3 %
Uncertainty u 2.4 %
Result FAILED
Overall result FAILED
Signature
14.3 Calculations for Quick-Check

Formulae
For the calculation of volume, Z-factor and measurement uncertainty, formulae according to ISO 8655-6 and
ISO/TR 20461 are used.
Rounding of values
● Values are rounded according to conventional rules (≥ 5 -> rounded).
● Entered values, e.g. water temperature, air pressure, etc., are rounded to one decimal place.
● Conv. factor Z is rounded after calculation to 6 decimal places. This is used for conversion of weight to vol
ume.
● The calculated volume is rounded to the resolution of the balance and shown in the protocol.
• 6-place balance: Microliters with 3 decimal places
• 5-place balance: Microliters with 2 decimal places
• 4-place balance: Microliters with 1 decimal place

15 Titration Application
Navigation: [ ] > [Titration]
The Titration application enables the automation of interaction between the balance and titrator. The optional
EasyScan™ enables data to be read and written to an RFID tag. The RFID tag serves as a data carrier between
the balance and titrator. The RFID tag placed on the base of a titrating beaker easily and reliably transfers the
sample data, e.g. sample ID and weight.
The Titration application is based on the weighing application. For automated operation with a titrator, the
Titration application has several settings and functions. Some settings and functions of the Weighing applica
tion do not apply here and have therefore been omitted. Only the settings and functions that differ from those of
the Weighing application are described in detail below.
1 Tap [ ].
2 Tap the [Titration] icon in the selection window.
Some of the specific titration function keys and information fields are activated by default (factory
defaults).
15.1 Titration application settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Titration] > [ ]
Various specific titration settings are available, which can be used to adapt the application to suit specific
requirements.
described below.
RFID Options Defines the behavior of the application. See Specific RFID option settings
(page 232)
Identification Activates/deactivates and names identification See Specific identifications for titra
fields. tion (page 233)
Function Keys Defines the titration function keys to appear at the see Specific titration function keys
bottom of the display. (page 234)
tions.
protocols. titration (page 235)
15.1.1 Specific RFID option settings

Navigation: [ ] > [Titration] > [ ] > RFID Options
This menu item can be used to configure certain behavior patterns of the application.

1 Tap [ ].
2 Under RFID Options, tap the [Define] button.
3 Select the required menu item.
4 Tap [On].
Auto start data Activates/deactivates automatic opening of the data editing win Off | On*
editing dow on detection of a new beaker.
See Specific identifications for titration (page 233)
Auto increment Activates/deactivates automatic step-by-step incrementation of ID Off* | On
ID 1 1.
See Specific identifications for titration (page 233).
Auto print when Activates/deactivates automatic printing when writing data to the Off* | On
writing RFID tag.
RFID recognition Activates/deactivates the RFID recognition beep. Off | On*
beep The beep sounds when the RFID reader has scanned the RFID tag
data.
* Factory setting
15.1.2 Specific identifications for titration

Navigation: [ ] > [Titration] > [ ] > Identification
The titration application provides (as with the Weighingapplication) 4 identifications. The available identifica
tions have been adapted to the specific titration requirements.
Identifications can be configured here, i.e. named and activated/deactivated.
ID 1 Defines a designation (max. 20 characters). Name
This field is prepared for use as a sample identifier (details
below).
In contrast to the other identifications, identification 1 cannot be
deactivated (identification is essential for interaction with the titra
tor).
ID 2 Activates/deactivates identification 2. Defines the designation Off | On* | Name
(max. 20 characters).
Corr. f. Activates/deactivates the correction factor. Defines the designa Off | On* | Name
tion (max. 20 characters).
This numeric field is intended for entry of the correction factor to
be used for titration.
Titration Application 233

Density Activates/deactivates the density. Defines the designation (max. Off | On* | Name
20 characters).
This numeric field is intended for entry of the density to be used
for titration.
* Factory setting
Identification management
Once the identifications have been configured, they can be assigned a content. The field content can be edited
with the [Edit Data] function key. When this function key is tapped, a window is displayed in which the values
of the activated identifications can be edited (the name allocated in the configuration is displayed as a parame
ter).
The activated identifications are written to the RFID tag together with the determined sample weight, when the
[Write RFID] function key is tapped.
The following rules apply to data entry:
Parameters Values
ID1 Max. 20 alphanumeric characters
ID2 Max. 20 alphanumeric characters
Corr. f. Numerical value, 0 … 1000000.0000
(1.0)*
Density Numerical value, 0 … 100.0000
(1.0)*
* Factory setting
To automate the use of ID 1 as a sample ID, the Auto increment ID 1 option can be activated. If this option is
selected, the field content of ID 1 is incremented by 1 after each completed weighing (if the last character is not
numerical, a digit is added).
See Specific RFID option settings (page 232).
The values of Corr. f. and Density are reset to the initial value 1.0 after each completed weighing. This pre
vents a once entered value from being unintentionally used for further samples.
If a larger number of samples are to be provided with the same correction factor and/or density, it is better and
safer to enter this data in the respective titrator method.
Display as information fields
It is recommended to display (activated) identifications as information fields.
15.1.3 Specific titration function keys

Navigation: [ ] > [Titration] > [ ] > Function Keys
sequence.
1 Press [ ].

Edit Data Displays a window for editing identifications.
Write RFID Starts writing to the RFID tag.
Read RFID Reads the data to an RFID tag.
15.1.4 Specific protocol information for titration

Navigation: [ ] > [Titration] > [ ] > Protocol
sequence.
1 Press [ ].
gle result.

Values Explanation
ID 1 Records the defined identification.
Corr. f. Records the correction factor.
Density Records the density.
Values Explanation
Protocol footer
values).
Values Explanation
Factory setting: Signature activated.
15.2 Working with the titration application

Navigation: [ ] > [Titration]
This section describes working with the Titration application.
This application requires the use of the optional accessory SmartSample™. The supplied drip tray and weigh
ing pan must be changed according to the enclosed assembly instructions.
Initial settings
To perform a weighing with RFID, at least 2 of the following function keys must be activated.
Edit Data – Activate function keys.
Write RFID
Note
When the application is started, the [Write RFID] and [Read RFID] function keys (if displayed) are inactive and
grayed.

Procedure
The procedure is very similar to the Weighing application. A brief description of the procedure and features of
the Titration application is provided.
SmartSample™ is connected and configured.
1 Place a beaker with RFID tag on the weighing pan.
The balance checks the RFID type and activates the [Read RFID] function key (if displayed).
If the Auto start data editing option is selected, an identification editing window is opened. Relevant
data can be entered here
2 Tap [ ].
The balance is tared.
The [Write RFID] function key is activated.
3 Place the sample in the beaker.
or
Remove the empty beaker from the weighing pan. Place the sample in the beaker. Place the beaker with the
sample back on the weighing pan.
The balance displays the sample weight.
4 Press [Write RFID] to write the data (activated identifications and weight) to the RFID tag of the beaker.
The balance waits for a stable weight display.
The data is written to the RFID tag of the beaker. If the Auto print when writing option is activated, the
data is simultaneously printed on the printer (if a printer is connected).
The balance displays a message confirming that the data has been successfully written (all written data
is also displayed).
5 Remove the beaker from the weighing pan.
The [Read RFID] and [Write RFID] function keys (if displayed) are inactive and grayed.
Weighing is complete.
- The Corr. f. and Density fields are reset to 1.0.
- If the Auto increment ID 1 option is activated, ID 1 is incremented by 1.
Identifications can be edited at any time during this procedure (preferably before writing data to the RFID tag)
with the Edit Data function key.

16 Maintenance
16.1 Cleaning
Periodically clean the weighing pan, the drip tray, the housing, and the terminal of your balance using the
brush supplied with it. The maintenance interval depends on your standard operating procedure (SOP).
Please observe the following notes:
WARNING


a) Disconnect the balance from the power supply prior to cleaning and maintenance.
b) Only use METTLER TOLEDO power cords, if these need to be replaced.
c) Ensure that no liquid comes into contact with the balance, terminal or AC adapter.
d) Do not open the balance, terminal or AC adapter.
These contain no user-serviceable parts.
CAUTION

Damage to balance
Under no circumstances use cleaning agents containing solvents or abrasive agents, as this
can damage the terminal overlay.
Cleaning
Your balance is made from high quality, resistant materials and can therefore be cleaned with a commercially
available, mild cleaning agent.
1 To clean the weighing chamber thoroughly, move the draft shield glass panels (including intermediate
shelf) away from the balance and remove them from their fastenings.
2 Carefully lift the front of the weighing pan and lift it out of the guide.
3 Remove the drip tray from the balance.
4 Ensure that these parts are correctly positioned when refitted.
Note
Contact a METTLER TOLEDO representative to find about the service options available – regular maintenance
by an authorized service engineer will ensure consistent weighing accuracy over the long term and extend the
service life of the balance.
16.2 Disposal
In conformance with the European Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (WEEE) this device may not be disposed of in domestic waste. This also applies
to countries outside the EU, per their specific requirements.
Please dispose of this product in accordance with local regulations at the collecting point
specified for electrical and electronic equipment. If you have any questions, please contact
the responsible authority or the distributor from which you purchased this device. Should this
device be passed on to other parties (for private or professional use), the content of this regu
lation must also be related.
Thank you for your contribution to environmental protection.

16.3 Firmware (Software) Updates
METTLER TOLEDO is continuously improving its balance firmware (software) for the benefit of customers. So
that the customer can benefit quickly and easily from further developments, METTLER TOLEDO makes the latest
firmware versions available on the Internet. The firmware made available on the Internet has been developed
and tested by Mettler-Toledo AG using processes that meet the guidelines of ISO 9001. Mettler-Toledo AG does
not, however, accept liability for consequences that may arise from using the firmware.
16.3.1 How it Works
For important balance information and updates, visit METTLER TOLEDO at:
www.mettler-toledo-support.com
A program called e-Loader II will be downloaded together with the firmware update to your computer. This pro
gram can be used to transfer the firmware to the balance. Before transferring a firmware update to the balance,
all balance settings can be backed up with e-Loader II.
If the selected update should include an application not described in these instructions (or one that has been
updated in the meantime), the corresponding instructions can also be downloaded in Adobe Acrobat® PDF for
mat.
Note
New applications may not be visible until the type data has been updated by a service engineer.
Requirements
Minimum requirements for downloading applications from the Internet and installing them on the balance are
as follows:
● PC with one of the following Microsoft Windows® operating system:
• Microsoft® Windows® XP Home or Professional with Service Pack 3 (32 bit).
• Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium, Business, Ultimate or Enterprise with Service Pack 2 (32
bit and 64 bit).
• Microsoft® Windows 7 with Service Pack 1 Home Premium, Professional, Ultimate or Enterprise (32 bit
and 64 bit).
● Internet connection and web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer).
● Connecting cable between PC and balance (e.g. No. 11101051 see section Accessories).
16.3.2 Update Procedure
Installing the e-Loader II software downloaded from the Internet on your PC.
1 Establish a connection to the Internet.
2 Visit http://www.mettler-toledo-support.com.
3 Enter the required registration information on the METTLER TOLEDO Balance Support Site.
4 Click on the Customer Support link and login.
5 Click on your balance model.
6 Click on the required firmware version and install it.
Transferring the new firmware to the balance
– Start e-Loader II and follow the instructions, which will provide a step-by-step guide through the installa
tion.
Important
– Perform a Master Reset after the firmware update.
Maintenance 239
17 Troubleshooting
17.1 Error messages
The majority of error messages are displayed in plain text in the respective application accompanied by remedi
al instructions. Error messages of this type are self-explanatory and therefore are not mentioned below. The fol
lowing error messages can be displayed instead of the weighing result.
Error message Cause Remedy
Weight display
Overload – the applied weight exceeds – Reduce the sample weight.
the weighing capacity of the balance.
Underload – sample pan holder is miss – Check that the weighing pan is posi
ing. tioned correctly, moves freely and
does not scrape against the draft
cover.
Weight display flashes/Out of zero – Remove the weight.
range – when one or several range lim
its are exceeded when the balance is
switched on or zeroed. This message is
always displayed when a weight is
present in the weighing pan when the
balance is switched on.
Timeout Taring or zeroing was aborted due to a 1 Close the draft shield doors and
lack of stability. check the location (draft, vibrations).
3 Repeat the procedure.
Error message Cause Remedy
Data could not be read RFID unit failed to respond and was 1 Check that the RFID unit is correctly
from RFID tag. timed out. RFID unit incorrectly connect connected.
RFID unit not respond ed or configured.
2 Check the RFID configuration
ing!
Data could not be writ See above See above
ten to RFID tag.
RFID unit not respond
ing!
Data could not be read Hardware problem – Use a different RFID tag.
from RFID tag.
RFID error
Data could not be writ See above See above
ten to RFID tag.
RFID error
RFID tag is not compati RFID tag contains data of other applica – Use a different RFID tag.
ble with this application tions, e.g. pipette check.
No RFID tag detected. RFID tag removed from balance during – Place the beaker with the RFID tag
read operation on the balance again.
RFID tag removed from balance during See above
write operation
For RFID configuration, see Pipette configuration (page 229).
240 Maintenance
Other error messages
If error messages are displayed other than those described above ("Error x"), contact a METTLER TOLEDO rep
resentative.
17.2 Status messages/Status icons

Cause Remedy
Automatic ProFACT Adjustment is currently not 1 Unload the balance.
possible as the balance is busy.
2 Do not select any key for 2 minutes.
The display stabilizes.
The status icon extinguishes after success
ful adjustment.
A request for automatic adjustment with an exter – Carry out the adjustment.
nal weight was defined in the system settings.
The status icon extinguishes after success
ful adjustment or
if adjustment is declined.
A request for automatic testing of the adjustment – Carry out the test.
with an external weight was defined in the sys
The status icon extinguishes after a suc
tem settings.
cessful test
or if the test is declined.
The MinWeigh function is active. – Ensure that the minimum weight is reached.
This indicates that the minimum weight for the The status icon extinguishes.
current tare was not yet reached.
The next test for the MinWeigh function is due. – Contact a METTLER TOLEDO representative as
soon as possible.
A service engineer will carry out the test as
soon as possible.
The balance battery must be replaced. This bat – Contact a METTLER TOLEDO representative as
tery ensures that the date and time are retained soon as possible.
when the balance is disconnected from the power
The battery can be replaced by a service
supply.
engineer.
The balance is due for a service. – Contact a METTLER TOLEDO representative as
soon as possible.
The balance can be serviced by a service
engineer.
The built-in level sensor has detected that the bal – Immediately level the balance.
ance is not correctly leveled.
The status icon extinguishes as soon as the
balance is correctly leveled.
A request for automatic performance of a task – Carry out the task.
was defined in the system settings.
The status icon extinguishes after the task
is carried out.
Troubleshooting 241
The Antistatic Kit is active, i.e. the ionizer is on. The control cable of the Antistatic Kit is con
This icon only indicates that the Antistatic Kit is nected to the balance and the balance is con
active, however this does not mean that the Anti nected to the power supply and switched on.
static Kit is actually switched on and ready to – For zeroing, taring and adjustment, the ionizer
use. is deactivated and the status icon extinguishes
as the ionizer could disturb these operations.
When these operations have been completed,
tap the [Ionizer] function key to activate the
ionizer again.
17.3 What to do if....?
Symptom Countermeasure
Display remains dark after ● It must be ensured that the terminal is correctly connected to the balance.
switching on ● Ensure that the balance is connected to the power supply and switched
on.
● If the problem persists, contact a METTLER TOLEDO representative.
Keys and buttons do not ● Reboot the system by disconnecting and reconnecting it to the power
respond supply.
● If the problem persists, contact a METTLER TOLEDO representative.
The connected printer does not ● Ensure that the printer is switched on and activated in the menu. See
print Peripherals.
● Check the printer settings. See Recommended printer settings
(page 264).
Incorrect characters are printed ● Change the bit/parity settings of the printer and balance to 8/No.
● Check that both devices have the same baud rate setting. See Peripher
als.
● Use the appropriate character sets. See Recommended printer settings
(page 264).
242 Troubleshooting
18 Technical Data
18.1 General data
CAUTION

Only use an approved AC adapter with a current-limited SELV output.

Ensure correct polarity
Power supply
AC adapter: Primary: 100 – 240 V AC, -15%/+10%, 50/60 Hz
Secondary: 12 V DC ±3%, 2.5 A (with electronic overload pro
tection)
Cable for AC adapter: 3-core, with country-specific plug
Balance power supply: 12 V DC ±3%, 2.25 A, maximum ripple: 80 mVpp
Protection and standards

Overvoltage category: II
Degree of pollution: 2
Protection: Protected against dust and water
Standards for safety and EMC: See Declaration of Conformity
Range of application: For use only in closed interior rooms
Environmental conditions
Height above mean sea level: Up to 4000 m
Ambient temperature: 5–40 °C
Relative air humidity: Max. 80% up to 31 °C, linearly decreasing to 50% at 40 °C,
noncondensing
Warm-up time: At least 120 minutes after connecting the balance to the power
supply; when switched on from standby-mode, the balance is
ready for operation immediately
Materials
Housing: Die-cast aluminum, plastic, chrome steel and glass
Terminal: Die-cast zinc, chromed and plastics
SmartGrid: Chrome-nickel steel X5CrNi18-10
18.2 Explanatory notes for the METTLER TOLEDO AC adapter

The certified external power supply which conforms to the requirements for Class II double insulated equipment
is not provided with a protective earth connection but with a functional earth connection for EMC purposes. This
earth connection IS NOT a safety feature. Further information about conformance of our products can be found
in the brochure "Declaration of Conformity" which is coming with each product.
In case of testing with regard to the European Directive 2001/95/EC the power supply and the balance have to
be handled as Class II double insulated equipment.
Consequently an earth bonding test is not required. Similarly it is not necessary to carry out an earth bonding
test between the supply earth conductor and any exposed metalwork on the balance.
Because the balance are sensitive to static charges a leakage resistor, typically 10 kΩ, is connected between
the earth connector and the power supply output terminals. The arrangement is shown in the equivalent circuit
diagram. This resistor is not part of the electrical safety arrangement and does not require testing at regular
intervals.
Technical Data 243

Plastic Housing
Double Insulation
P
AC
Input 100…240 VAC Output 12 VDC
N DC
10 kΩ coupling resistor for

electrostatic discharge
Equivalent circuit diagram
18.3 Model-specific data
XPE105 XPE205 XPE205DR
Limit values
Maximum capacity 120 g 220 g 220 g
Readability 0.01 mg 0.01 mg 0.1 mg
Tare range (from…to) 0 … 120 g 0 … 220 g 0 … 220 g
Maximum capacity in fine range – – 81 g
Readability in fine range – – 0.01 mg
Repeatability (at nominal load) sd 0.03 mg (100 g) 0.03 mg (200 g) 0.06 mg (200 g)
Repeatability (at low load) sd 0.015 mg (10 g) 0.015 mg (10 g) 0.05 mg (10 g)
Repeatability in fine range (at low load) sd – – 0.015 mg (10 g)
Linearity deviation 0.1 mg 0.1 mg 0.15 mg
Eccentric deviation (test load) 1) 0.12 mg (50 g) 0.2 mg (100 g) 0.25 mg (100 g)
Sensitivity offset (test weight) 0.3 mg (100 g) 0.5 mg (200 g) 0.5 mg (200 g)
Sensitivity temperature drift 2) 0.0001%/°C 0.0001%/°C 0.0001%/°C
Sensitivity stability 3) 0.0001%/a 0.0001%/a 0.0001%/a
Typical values
Repeatability (at low load) sd 0.007 mg (5 g) 0.007 mg (10 g) –
Repeatability in fine range sd – – 0.007 mg (10 g)
Linearity deviation 0.065 mg 0.065 mg 0.1 mg
Eccentric deviation (test load) 1) 0.065 mg (50 g) 0.1 mg (100 g) 0.1 mg (100 g)
Sensitivity offset (test weight) 0.15 mg (100 g) 0.2 mg (200 g) 0.32 mg (200 g)
Minimum weight (according to USP) 14 mg 14 mg 80 mg
Minimum weight (according to USP) in fine – – 14 mg
range
Minimum weight (U=1%, k=2) 1.4 mg 1.4 mg 8 mg
Minimum weight (U=1%, k=2) in fine range – – 1.4 mg
Setting time 2.5 s 2.5 s 1.5 s
Setting time in fine range – – 2.5 s
Dimensions
Balance dimensions (W × D × H) 263 × 493 × 322 mm 263 × 493 × 322 mm 263 × 493 × 322 mm
Weighing pan dimensions 78 × 73 mm (W × D) 78 × 73 mm (W × D) 78 × 73 mm (W × D)
Typical uncertainties and supplementary data
Repeatability sd 0.007 mg + 0.007 mg + 0.04 mg +
0.000012%·Rgr 0.000006%·Rgr 0.000005%·Rgr
Repeatability in fine range sd – – 0.007 mg +
0.000012%·Rgr
Differential linearity deviation sd √(10 pg·Rnt) √(5pg·Rnt) √(12pg·Rnt)
Differential eccentric load deviation sd 0.00008%·Rnt 0.00006%·Rnt 0.00008%·Rnt
Sensitivity offset sd 0.00006%·Rnt 0.00006%·Rnt 0.00006%·Rnt
Minimum weight (according to USP) 14 mg + 0.024%·Rgr 14 mg + 0.012%·Rgr 80 mg + 0.01%·Rgr
244 Technical Data

XPE105 XPE205 XPE205DR
Minimum weight (according to USP) in fine – – 14 mg + 0.024%·Rgr
range
Minimum weight (U=1%, k=2) 1.4 mg + 0.0024%·Rgr 1.4 mg + 0.0012%·Rgr 8 mg + 0.001%·Rgr
Minimum weight (U=1%, k=2) in fine range – – 1.4 mg + 0.0024%·Rgr
Weighing time 4s 6s 4s
Weighing time in fine range – – 6s
Interface update rate 23/s 23/s 23/s
Usable height of draft shield 235 mm 235 mm 235 mm
Weight of balance 10.4 kg 10.4 kg 10.4 kg
Number of built-in reference weights 2 2 2
Weights for routine testing
OIML CarePac 100 g F2, 5 g E2 200 g F2, 10 g F1 200 g F2, 10 g F1
Weights #11123002 #11123001 #11123001
ASTM CarePac 100 g 1, 5 g 1 200 g 1, 10 g 1 200 g 1, 10 g 1
Weights #11123102 #11123101 #11123101
sd = Standard deviation Rnt = Net weight (sample weight)

Rgr = Gross weight a = Year (annum)
1) Valid for compact objects 2) After adjustment with built-in reference weight
3) On DeltaRange models: fine range starts at zero load (gross)
XPE204 XPE504
Limit values
Maximum capacity 220 g 520 g
Readability 0.1 mg 0.1 mg
Tare range (from…to) 0 … 220 g 0 … 520 g
Maximum capacity in fine range – –
Readability in fine range – –
Repeatability (at nominal load) sd 0.07 mg (200 g) 0.12 mg (500 g)
Repeatability (at low load) sd 0.05 mg (10 g) 0.08 mg (10 g)
Repeatability in fine range (at low load) sd – –
Linearity deviation 0.2 mg 0.4 mg
Eccentric deviation (test load) 1) 0.25 mg (100 g) 0.4 mg (200 g)
Sensitivity offset (test weight) 0.6 mg (200 g) 1.5 mg (500 g)
Sensitivity temperature drift 2) 0.0001%/°C 0.0001%/°C
Sensitivity stability 3) 0.0001%/a 0.0001%/a
Typical values
Repeatability (at low load) sd 0.04 mg (10 g) 0.04 mg (10 g)
Repeatability in fine range sd – –
Linearity deviation 0.13 mg 0.32 mg
Eccentric deviation (test load) 1) 0.12 mg (100 g) 0.2 mg (200 g)
Sensitivity offset (test weight) 0.4 mg (200 g) 0.6 mg (500 g)
Minimum weight (according to USP) 80 mg 80 mg
Minimum weight (according to USP) in fine – –
range
Minimum weight (U=1%, k=2) 8 mg 8 mg
Minimum weight (U=1%, k=2) in fine range – –
Setting time 1.5 s 1.5 s
Setting time in fine range – –
Dimensions
Balance dimensions (W × D × H) 263 × 493 × 322 mm 263 × 493 × 322 mm
Weighing pan dimensions 78 × 73 mm (W × D) 78 × 73 mm (W × D)
Typical uncertainties and supplementary data
Repeatability sd 0.04 mg + 0.04 mg +
0.00001%·Rgr 0.000008%·Rgr
Repeatability in fine range sd – –
Differential linearity deviation sd √(20 pg·Rnt) √(50 pg·Rnt)
Differential eccentric load deviation sd 0.00008%·Rnt 0.00006%·Rnt
Technical Data 245

XPE204 XPE504
Sensitivity offset sd 0.00006%·Rnt 0.00006%·Rnt
Minimum weight (according to USP) 80 mg + 0.02%·Rgr 80 mg + 0.016%·Rgr
Minimum weight (according to USP) in fine – –
range
Minimum weight (U=1%, k=2) 8 mg + 0.002%·Rgr 8 mg + 0.0016%·Rgr
Minimum weight (U=1%, k=2) in fine range – –
Weighing time 4s 4s
Weighing time in fine range – –
Interface update rate 23/s 23/s
Usable height of draft shield 235 mm 235 mm
Weight of balance 10.4 kg 10.4 kg
Number of built-in reference weights 2 2
Weights for routine testing
OIML CarePac 200 g F2, 10 g F1 500 g F2, 20 g F1
Weights #11123001 #11123007
ASTM CarePac 200 g 1, 10 g 1 500 g 1, 20 g 1
Weights #11123101 #11123107
sd = Standard deviation Rnt = Net weight (sample weight)

Rgr = Gross weight a = Year (annum)
1) Valid for compact objects 2) After adjustment with built-in reference weight
3) On DeltaRange models: fine range starts at zero load (gross)
246 Technical Data

18.4 Dimensions
Dimensions in mm.
150
METTLER TOLEDO
322
300
296
151
129
60
57
229
176.5 252
482 11
186
78
263
241
194
150
73
Technical Data 247

18.5 Interfaces
18.5.1 Specifications of RS232C
Interface type: Voltage interface according to EIA RS-232C/DIN 66020 (CCITT V24/V.28)
Max. cable length: 15 m
Signal level: Outputs: Inputs:
+5 V ... +15 V (RL = 3 – 7 kΩ) +3 V ... 25 V
–5 V ... –15 V (RL = 3 – 7 kΩ) –3 V ... 25 V
Connector: Sub-D, 9-pole, female
Operating mode: Full duplex
Transmission mode: Bit-serial, asynchronous
Transmission code: ASCII
Baud rates: 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 384001) (firmware selectable)
Bits/parity: 7-bit/even, 7-bit/odd, 7-bit/none, 8-bit/none (firmware selectable)
Stop bits: 1 stop bit
Handshake: None, XON/XOFF, RTS/CTS (firmware selectable)
End-of-line: <CR><LF>, <CR>, <LF> (firmware selectable)
GND Data Pin 2: Balance transmit line (TxD)
Pin 3: Balance receive line (RxD)
5 1 Pin 5: Ground signal (GND)

Pin 7: Clear to send (hardware handshake) (CTS)
9 6
Pin 8: Request to send (hardware handshake) (RTS)
Handshake
1) 38400 baud is only possible in special cases, such as:

• Weighing platform without terminal, or
• Weighing platform with terminal, only via the optional RS232C interface.
18.5.2 Specifications of "Aux" connection

You can connect the METTLER TOLEDO "ErgoSens" or an external switch to sockets "Aux 1" and "Aux 2". This
allows you to start functions such as taring, zeroing, printing and others.
External connection Do not connect!
Connector: 3.5 mm stereo jack connector
∅ 3.5 mm
Electrical data: Max. voltage 12 V

Max. current 150 mA GND
Connection contact
248 Technical Data

19 Accessories and Spare Parts
19.1 Accessories
Description Part No.
Printers
BT-P42 printer with Bluetooth connection to instrument 11132540
6.55 3
17.3
19.3 75 g
8.00 19 g
7.77 3 g
10.5 4 g g
8.09 06 g
5.87 7 g
3.20 6 g METTLER
Paper roll, set of 5 pcs 00072456
1.09 5 g
8g TOLEDO
Printe
r
Paper roll, self-adhesive, set of 3 pcs 11600388
Ribbon cartridge, black, set of 2 pcs 00065975
RS-P42 printer with RS232C connection to instrument 00229265

6.55 3
17.3
19.3 75 g
8.00 19 g
7.77 3 g
10.5 4 g g
8.09 06 g
5.87 7 g
3.20 6 g METTLER
1.09 5 g
8g TOLEDO
Printe
r
RS-P25 printer with RS232C connection to instrument 11124300

RS-P26 printer with RS232C connection to instrument (with 11124303

date and time)
LC-P45 application printer with additional functions 00229119

METTLER
TOLEDO

7
Def 8
4 Men 9
u
ID 5 0
Cod Men
1 e 6 u
F 2
1 2 Clea
3 r
LC-P
45 Prin Result 3
ter
31
Optional interfaces
Second RS232C Interface 11132500
Ethernet Interface for connection to an Ethernet network 11132515
Accessories and Spare Parts 249

BT option: Bluetooth Interface for multipoint connection for up 11132530
to 6 Bluetooth devices
BTS option: Bluetooth Interface, single-point connection 11132535
PS/2 option: Interface for connecting commercial keyboards 11132520

and barcode readers
LocalCAN option: Interface for connection of up to 5 LC 11132505

(LocalCAN) instruments
MiniMettler option: Interface MiniMettler, for connection to older 11132510

(legacy) METTLER TOLEDO systems
RS232 - USB converter cable – Cable with converter to connect 64088427

a balance (RS232) to a USB port
Cables for RS232C interface

RS9 – RS9 (m/f): connection cable for PC, length = 1 m 11101051
RS9 – RS25 (m/f): connection cable for PC, length = 2 m 11101052

Cables for LocalCAN interface
LC – RS9: Cable for connecting a PC with RS232C, 9-pin (f), 00229065
lenght = 2 m
LC – RS25: Cable for connecting a printer or PC with RS232C, 00229050

25-pin (m/f), lenght = 2 m
LC – CL: Cable for connecting a device with METTLER TOLEDO 00229130

CL interface (5-pin), length = 2 m
LC – LC2: Extension cable for LocalCAN, length = 2 m 00229115
LC – LC5: Extension cable for LocalCAN, length = 5 m 00229116
LC – LCT: Cable branch (T-connector) for LocalCAN 00229118
Cables for MiniMettler interface

MM – RS9f: RS232C connection cable to MiniMettler interface, 00229029
length = 1.5 m
Cable, one-sided open (2-pin)

Cable between balance and AC adapter, length = 4 m 11132037

Auxiliary displays
BT-BLD Bluetooth auxiliary display for table mounting, 11132555
168 mm, LCD display with backlighting
LC/RS-BLD auxiliary display on bench stand, backlit (incl. RS 00224200

cable and separate AC adapter)
RS/LC-BLDS auxiliary display for table or balance mounting, 11132630

480 mm, LCD display with backlighting
Sensors
ErgoSens, optical sensor for hands-free operation 11132601
LC-Switchbox
For connection of up to 3 balances with LocalCAN interface to 00229220
a printer
Footswitches
Footswitch with selectable function for balances (Aux 1, Aux 2) 11106741
LC-FS foot switch with selectable function for balances with 00229060
LocalCAN interface

Filling-process control
LV11 automatic feeder for automatic loading of small items on 21900608
the balance
LV11 Draft shield door 11106715
SQC14 filling process control
Compact instrument with printer for control of up to 00236210
16 articles
Compact instrument with printer for control of up to 00236211
60 articles
AntiStatic kit
Compact Antistatic Kit. Eliminates the build-up of electrostatic 30090337
charges on containers and samples.
Note For the operation of 2 compact Antistatic Kits, an addi
tional AC adapter can be ordered, see Various accessories.
Universal AntiStatic Kit complete (U-shaped), including elec 11107767

trode and power supply
Optional: Second U-electrode* for universal AntiStatic Kit 11107764
* Power supply for optional, second U-elektrode (11107764) 11107766
ErgoClips
Weighing kit for various weighing containers
ErgoClip Weighing kit 11106707
Delivery: 3 ErgoClips for Round-Bottom Flask, Weighing Boat
and Tube, 20 Weighing Boat, 10 Single-use aluminium weigh
ing pans.
ErgoClip "Basket" 11106747
ErgoClip "Titration Basket" 11106883
ErgoClip "Weighing Boat" 11106748

ErgoClip "Round-Bottom Flask" 11106746
ErgoClip "small Flask" 11140180
ErgoClip "Filter holder" 11140185
ErgoClip "Stand" 11140170
ErgoClip "Flask" 11106764
ErgoClip "Tube" 11106784
ErgoClip for Quantos 11141570
ErgoClip Syringe 30008288

Single-use aluminium weighing pans, 10 units 11106711
SmardGrid cover, chromium-nickel steel 11106709
SmartPrep™, single-use funnel for quick and easy sample 30061260

preparation. For flask sizes 10/19, 12/21, 14/23. 50 pcs
Grey drip tray 30038741
MinWeigh door 11106749
Filter kit
Filter kit for, until 110 mm 11140000
Density determination
Density kit 11106706
Sinker for density of liquids in conjunction with Density Kit 00210260

Calibrated (sinker + certificate) 00210672
Recalibrated (new certificate) 00210674

Calibrated thermometer with certificate 11132685
Pipette calibration
Evaporation Trap, incl. adpater 11140043
Evaporation Trap large 11138440
1-channel suction pump complete 11138268

Hose 2 m for suction pump 11138132
Reagent reservoirs, 5 pcs. 11600616
Barometer 11600086
Precision thermometer with clip, not certified 00238767

Calibry PC Software
Calibry Light; for single channel pipettes 11138423
Calibry Update 30007342
Calibry Single workstation; for calibration with one 11138419
system MPC
Update 30007340
Calibry Network; Installation on several PC of the 11138420
network accessing the same database
Update 30007341
Calibry Validation manual 11780959
RFID reader
EasyScan™, accessory for pipette check application. Reads 30078900
and writes RFID tags (radio frequency identification).
SmartSample™, accessory for titration application for transfer 30078901

ring sample information from the balance to the titrator. Reads
and writes RFID tags (radio frequency identification). The kit
includes:
● EasyScan™
● SmartSample™ drip tray
● SmartSample™ SmartGrid
Smart Tag
Set of 50 pieces 30101517
Set of 200 pieces 30101518
Barcode reader
RS232C Barcode Reader 21901297
The following accessories are needed for operation (not included):
RS232 F cable 21901305
Null modem adapter 21900924
Plus one of the following: AC adapter 5 V for EU 21901370
AC adapter 5 V for US 21901372
AC adapter 5 V for GB 21901371
AC adapter 5 V for AU 21901370
+ 71209966

RS232C Barcode Reader – Cordless 21901299
The following accessories are needed for operation (not included):
Cradle 21901300
RS232 F cable 21901305
Null modem adapter 21900924
Plus one of the following: AC adapter 12 V for EU 21901373
AC adapter 12 V for US 21901375
AC adapter 12 V for GB 21901374
AC adapter 12 V for AU 21901373
+ 71209966
PS/2 Barcode Reader, without cable 21901297

PS/2 wedge single cable 21901307
PS/2Y Barcode Reader, without cable 21901297

PS/2 wedge twin (Y) cable 21901308
Anti-theft devices
Steel cable 11600361
Protective covers
Protective cover for terminal 30059776
Dust covers
Dust cover 30035838

Software
LabX software for one click™ weighing solutions on request
Enables you to perform One Click™ Standard Preparation, One
Click™ Loss on Drying, One Click™ Sieve Analysis and many
other applications.
Simply start the method with the One Click™ shortcut on the
balance touchscreen. LabX guides you step-by-step through
the SOP on the balance, performs your calculations automati
cally, and takes care of saving all your data. The complete
solution can be tailored to match your process requirements.
Visit www.mt.com/one-click-weighing for more information
Freeweigh.Net 21900895
Freeweigh.
Net
Various
Intermediate shelf 30096753
Terminal and printer stand, mounting on balance 11106730
Wall fixture for terminal 11132665
AC/DC adapter (without power cable) 100–240 V AC, 0.8 A, 11107909

50/60 Hz, 12 V DC 2.5 A

Country-specific 3-Pin power cable with grounding conductor.
Power cable AU 00088751
Power cable BR 30015268
Power cable CH 00087920
Power cable CN 30047293
Power cable DK 00087452
Power cable EU 00087925
Power cable GB 00089405
Power cable IL 00225297
Power cable IN 11600569
Power cable IT 00087457
Power cable JP 11107881
Power cable TH, PE 11107880
Power cable US 00088668
Power cable ZA 00089728
IP54 protective housing for AC adapter 11132550
Level bubble mirror 11140150
Weighing table 11138042

19.2 Spare parts
No. Designation Part No.
2 1 1 Side panel 11106841
2 Top draft shield door 30096752
3 Front glass panel 11106843
4 SmartGrid 11106333
5 Drip tray with "StaticDetect" 30067297
6 Terminal support 30059773
7 Foot screw 30072531
8 Clip 11106511
4 8
7
5
6
Brush 00071650
Terminal complete with firmware 30087553
Packaging, complete 30096766

No. Designation Part No.
Export box 30087807

20 Appendix
20.1 MT-SICS interface commands and functions
Many of the instruments and balances used have to be capable of integration in a complex computer or data
acquisition system.
To enable you to integrate balances in your system in a simple manner and utilize their capabilities to the full,
most balance functions are also available as appropriate commands via the data interface.
All new METTLER TOLEDO balances launched on the market support the standardized command set "METTLER
TOLEDO Standard Interface Command Set" (MT-SICS). The commands available depending on the functionality
of the balance.
For further information please refer to the Reference Manual MT-SICS downloadable from the Internet under
u www.mt.com/xpe-analytical
20.2 Procedure for certified balances

Preface
Certified balances are subject to the national, legal requirements of "non-automatic balances".
Switching on the balance
● Switching on
• Immediately after being switched on, the balance displays 0.000.. g.
• The balance is always started up with the "Factory setting" unit.
● Switch-on range
• At maximum 20% of the type load, otherwise overload is displayed (OIML R76 4.5.1).
● Stored value as switch-on zero point

• It is not permissible to use a stored value as a switch-on zero point; the MT-SICS M35 command is not
available (OIML R76 T.5.2).
Display
● Display of the weight value
• The "e" certification value is always shown in the display and is specified at the model designation plate
(OIML R76 T.3.2.3 and 7.1.4).
• If the display increment is lower than the "e" certification value, this is variably displayed for the net, gross
and weighed tare. (Graying of the digits or certification brackets) (OIML R76 T.2.5.4 and 3.4.1).
● In accordance with guidelines, the tested display increment (certification value) is never lower than 1 mg
(OIML R76 T.3.4.2).
● At balances with d = 0.1 mg, the digits below 1 mg are displayed in gray. These digits in brackets are
printed. In accordance with legal metrology requirements, this illustration does not affect the accuracy of the
weighing results.
● Units of measurement
• The display and info unit are firmly set to g or mg (depending on the model).
• The following applies for the "Custom unit":
– No certification brackets.
– The following names are blocked, this applies to upper and lower case letters.
– All official units (g, kg, ct etc.).
– c, ca, car, cm, crt, cart, kt, gr, gra, gram, grm, k, kilo, to, ton.
– All names with "o" which can be replaced by a zero (0z, 0zt etc.).
Appendix 263
● Identification of the weight display
• Gross, net, tare and other weight values are accordingly marked (OIML R76 4.6.5).
– Net for net when a tare value has been used.
– B or G for gross.
– T for the weighed tare.
– PT for the specified tare.
– * or diff for the difference between the net or gross.
● Info field
• The info weight value is handled metrologically in the same way as the weight value in the main display.
Printout (OIML R76 4.6.11)

● If a tare value is entered manually (PreTare), the PreTare value is always printed along with the net value
(PT 123.45 g).
● The printed weight values are identified in the same way as the weight value on the display.
I.e. N, B or G, T, PT, diff or *, with differentiation.
Example:
Single-range balance.
N 123.4[5] g
PT 10.00 g ➔ for PreTare
G 133.4[5] g
DR balance with 100.00 g fine range.
N 80.4[0] g
T 22.5[6] g ➔ for weighed tare
G 102.9[ ] g
Balance functions
● Reset to zero
• The zero range is limited to a maximum of ± 2% of the full load (OIML R76 4.5.1).
● Tare
• No negative tare values are permitted.
• Tare immediate (TI) is not permitted, the MT-SICS TI command is not available (OIML R76 4.6.4).
● 1/xd
• e=d
The 1/xd switchover is not permitted (OIML R76 3.1.2).
• e = 10d
This is only permitted in the case of the 1/10d switchover.
• e = 100d
Only the 1/10d and 1/100d switchover are permitted.
20.3 Recommended printer settings

English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Polish, Czech, Hungarian
Printer Balance Balance/Printer
Model Char Set Char Set Baud rate Bit/Parity Stop bits Handshake End of Line
RS- Ansi/Win Ansi/Win 9600 8/No 1 Xon/Xoff <CR><LF>
P25/26/28 Latin 1 1)
264 Appendix
RS-/LC- IBM/DOS 1) IBM/DOS 1200 8/No 1 None <CR><LF>
P42/43/45 1)
Chinese/Japanese
P25/26/28 Latin 1 1)
3)
RS-/LC- — 2) — 2) — 2) — 2) — 2) — 2) — 2)
P42/43/45
Russian
RS- IBM/DOS Ansi/Win 9600 8/No 1 Xon/Xoff <CR><LF>
P25/26/28 Cyrillic 1)
RS-/LC- — 2) — 2) — 2) — 2) — 2) — 2) — 2)
P42/43/45
Katakana
P25/26/28 Japanese 1)
RS-/LC- Ansi/Win1) Ansi/Win 1200 8/No 1 None <CR><LF>

P42/43/45 1)
1) Printer settings not available.

2) Required font for this language not available.
3) RS-P26, possible from firmware version 2.0.
Appendix 265
Glossary
Actual value
Weight from the weight certificate of a test weight.
Actual weight
The actual recorded weight of an external test weight. Irrespective of balance model.
Adjustment
Adjusts the balance sensitivity. For this purpose, at least one reference weight is placed on the weighing pan
either manually or motorized. This is weighed and the indicated weight is stored. The sensitivity of the balance
is subsequently corrected by the required amount.
Adjustment weight
External test weight for adjustment.
Calibration
Verification of the test weight with the issuance of a certificate.
Control limit
Tolerance of a process with respect to its set value. Exceeding the tolerance is a violation of quality require
ments and therefore requires a correction of the process.
Eccentric load deviation
Deviation of weight indications caused by eccentric loads.
Eccentric load test
necessary user SOP tolerances. The result corresponds to the highest of the 4 determined eccentric load devia
tions.
External adjustment weight
External test weight for adjustment.
External test weight
External test weight for testing the adjustment.
External test weight
Traceable weight for adjustment or testing.
FACT
FACT (Fully Automatic Calibration Technology) adjusts the balance based on a preselected temperature criterion
fully automatically.
GWP History
History of test sequences carried out.
GWP Test Manager
List of safety functions for XS/XP balances. The balance provides active support with test requests and previous
ly defined guided sequences.
GWP® Verification
Service providing a personalized document with precise suggestions for routine balance testing: • how should
the balance be tested and how often • which weights should be used • which tolerances are appropriate
Internal adjustment weight
Built-in weight for adjustment.
266 Glossary
Internal test weight
Built-in weight for testing the adjustment.
Internal weight
Built-in weight.
Method
A method describes the type of test to be carried out and defines the main purpose of a test sequence. The
weights to be used and corresponding test or method tolerances must be defined as part of the method.
Method tolerances
Method result deviation tolerance limit.
Minimum weight
Minimum weight required for weighing with relative accuracy (MinWeigh).
ProFACT
ProFACT (Professional Fully Automatic Calibration Technology) adjusts the balance based on a preselected
temperature criterion fully automatically.
Repeatability
The capability of a balance to display corresponding weights with repeated weighings of the same object in the
same manner under the same conditions.
Repeatability test
Verification of the repeatability.
Result tolerances
The same as method tolerance.
Routine test
Performance of different (routine) tests for testing the balance.
Routine test
Test carried out routinely.
Sensitivity
A change in weight divided by the causal change in load.
Sensitivity test
Sensitivity verification.
Task
Tasks define when a test sequence must be carried out and how it is started and, for XP balances, who should
carry out the test sequence. Before a task can be defined, the test sequence must already be defined.
Test
Collective term for testing a single function or an entire device.
Test history
Record of test results saved in a special fail-safe memory. The options in the test history allow the selection of
results for documentation or printing.
Test sequence
Describes the type of test (method) and the weight with which this test must be carried out. It also defines the
balance behavior if the test is not passed.
Glossary 267
Test tolerances
Weight tolerance deviation limit for testing.
Test weight
An external weight used as a reference weight.
Testing the adjustment
According to GWP Test Manager nomenclature, corresponds to a sensitivity test.
Warning limit
An upper or lower limit, which if exceeded or not reached, makes more stringent process monitoring necessary.
Weight tolerances
a) Tolerances of certified test weights or b) Tolerances relating to a weighed weight (e.g. tare weight).
268 Glossary
Index Change of user 64
Change password 80
A Changing a password 77
Class 45
AC adapter 30, 243, 243
Cleaning 238
Access rights 76, 78
Clear value 219
Acoustic signal 90
Clear values 220
Actual value 45
Color display of the weighing 91
Additive mode 134
result
Additive weighing 134
Color selection 89
Adjustment 42, 43, 67,
Component database 161
119, 120
Component database 149, 150, 156
Adjustment data 70
Components 149, 150, 161
Adjustment records 122
Configuration
Adjustment report 71
Application-specific set 22
Adjustment sequence 68
tings
Adjustment with an external test 68
Connecting the balance 30
weight
Connecting to power supply 30
Adjustment with external test 120
Copy tare 220
weight
Counting 172
Adjustment with internal weight 120
Administrator 76, 77 D
Ambient conditions 84 Data output 106
Antistatic kit 113 Date 18, 73
Application 17, 95, 224, Defined days 65
234 Defined users 66
Applications 21, 82 Defining a new series 209
Application-specific settings Deleting a series 211
Configuration 22 Density Application 184, 191
Assembling the balance 26 Density determination 184, 184,
Attempts 60 185, 185,
Automatic taring function 111, 115 187, 191, 198
Automatic weight entry 131, 165 Density determination method 185
Automatic zero correction 85 Density kit 184
Automatic zeroing 143 Density of liquids 201
AutoZero Density of solids 200
Automatic zero correction 85 Density statistics 198
Aux connections 248 Density table for distilled water 201
Aux. liquid 185, 191, 196 Density table for ethanol 202
B Determination of the density of 193, 195
liquids
Backspace 23
Determination of the density of 191
Balance functions 264
non-porous solids
Balance information 72
Balance settings 78
pasty substances
Barcode 208
Barcode data 208
porous solids
Barcode data 108
Dialog language 77, 86
Barcode reader 108
Differential weighing 203, 203,
Battery replacement 56
Beep 90 205, 209,
Beep volume 90 211, 213
Below-the-balance weighing 33 Differential weighing application 203, 211
Blocks the balance 68 Differential weighing methods 211
Buttons 11 Dimensions 247
Display 18, 263
C Display brightness 89
Certificate number 45 Display color 89
Certified balances 263 Display of the weight value 263
Index 269
Display statistical values 130 Fully automatic adjustment 120
Display unit 166, 178 Function key 163
Disposal 238 Function keys 19, 95, 97,
Door function 88 120, 130,
Doors 87 143, 155,
Draft shield intermediate shelf 28 163, 177,
186, 192,
E
193, 194,
EC method 49, 125 195, 196,
Eccentric load deviation 49, 125 204, 213,
Eccentric load test 49, 125 224, 234
Editing series 210
Electrostatic detection 113 G
e-Loader II 239 Gamma sphere 184, 194, 201
Energy saving function 73 General safety information 12
Environmental conditions 243 Glass draft shield 31
ErgoSens 112, 148, Glass draft shield doors 87
168, 180, Good Weighing Practice 42
190, 248 GWP history 62, 70
Error instructions 61 GWP® Test Manager 43
Error messages 240 GWP® Verification 42
Example log with statistical val 139
ues H
Example of a differential weigh 219 Hands-free sensors 112
ing protocol Hanger opening 184
Example protocol 139, 160, Header 100
174, 182,
I
198, 219, 230
Example protocol of a density 198 ID 23, 76, 77
determination Identification 72
Example protocol of a piece 175 Identification number 45
count with statistical values Identification of the weight dis 264
Example protocol of a pipette 231 play
check Identifications 107, 116,
Extended options 67 147, 233
External keyboard 109 Activate 107
External test weight 68, 69 Define 107
Info field 107, 264
F Info Unit 166
Factory settings 78, 91 Information fields 19, 97, 144,
Features 11 155, 164,
Firmware 20 177, 192,
Firmware update 239 193, 194,
Footer 100 195, 196, 205
Formulae 200, 221 Information unit 178
Formulas 140 Input test 68
Formulation 142, 149, Intended use 12
149, 150, Interface 74
155, 161 MT-SICS 263
Formulation application 142, 155 Interface options 75
Formulation database 150, 156 Internal weight adjustment 66
Formulation identifications 147 Interval 64
Formulation protocol information 145 Ionizer 113, 113
Formulation with % components 155
K
Formulations with fixed compo 152
nents Keyboard entries 109
Free formulation 156 Keys 11, 31
Free weighing unit 99
270 Index
L Password 23, 76, 77
Language 86 Password protection 77
Level sensor 30, 30, 81 Pasty substances 184, 201
Leveling 68, 81 Percent weighing 176, 177,
Leveling assistant 31 178, 181, 181
Limit value 134 Percent weighing application 176
Liquid 184 Peripheral devices 74
Local conditions 26 Piece counting 162, 163,
Location 26 164, 166,
Log 132, 145, 169, 169, 173
166, 178, Piece counting application 162
188, 206, Piece weight 169
225, 235 Pipette check 223
Lot counter 116 Pipette check application 223
LV11 tablet feeder 135 Plausibility check 134
Plausibility limit 134
M Power cord 29
Manual 63 Power supply 243
Manual entry of tare weight 115 Power supply voltage 29
Manual protocol printout 104 Pre-warning time 55, 127
Master reset 78 Print key 208
Materials 243 Printer settings 264, 265
Mean value 140 Printout 264
Measured value 85 ProFACT 66, 119, 120
Measured value release 85 Protection and standards 243
Method 47, 47, 124, Protocol 71, 100
191, 196, 198 Protocol data for piece counting 166
Method result 47 Protocol header 107
Method tolerances 47 Define 107
Minimum weight Protocol information for density 188
MinWeigh 118 determination
MinWeigh 56 Protocol information for differen 205
Minimum weight 109, 118 tial weighing
Model-specific data 246 Protocol information for percent 178
MT-SICS 263 weighing
Protocol printout 116
N Pycnometer 184, 195
Net weight 105
Net weight icon 105 Q
Nominal value 172 Quick-Check 227
Nominal weight 117, 138, 182
R
Number of decimal places 186
Number of repetitions 51, 53 Reading angle 32
Number of warnings 60 Recording 79
Reference optimization 173
O Reference unit quantity 163, 169
Oil bath 196 Reference unit weight 169
Option 75 Relative standard deviation 140
Optional interface 75 Release code 61
Out of zero range 240 Releases the balance 68
Output data 104 Remaining range display
Output format 105 Graphic remaining range 97
Output test 68 display
Overload 240 Reminder 55, 127
Reminder function 80
P Removing the terminal 33
Packaging 37 Repeatability 50, 52, 126,
Parameters 44, 44, 61 126
Index 271
Repeatability test 50, 126 19, 97, 118,
Repeatability test with tare 52, 126 139, 157,
weight 173, 182
Reset to zero 264 Software update 239
Resolution 114 Solids 184, 185
Result 186 Spare Parts 262
Result tolerances 47 Stability detector 31
RFID tag 232 Staff safety 13
RP1 method 50, 126 Standard deviation 140
RPT1 method 52, 126 Standby mode 72
RS232C interface 248 StaticDetect 113
Statistics 129, 185, 198
S Statistics Application 129, 135
Safety information 12 Statistics function 185
General 12 Statistics recording 138
Intended use 12 Status bar 90, 112, 148,
Staff safety 13 168, 180, 190
Sample 203, 208, 209 Status icon 241
Sample identification 208 Status icons 19
Sample protocol of a formulation 160 Status indicator 91
Sample protocol of a percent 183 Switching on 65
weighing Switching on the balance 30
Scope of delivery 25 Symbol 112, 148,
Screen saver 19 168, 180, 190
SE1 method 53, 127 Symbols 11
SE2 method 54, 127 System settings 22, 40
Security system 23, 77
Selecting a series 211 T
Self-test 30 Tare 220, 264
Sensitivity test 53, 54, 57, Tare memory 110, 115
58, 127, 127, Tare weight 57, 58, 115,
127, 128 127, 128
Sensor 112, 148, Tare weights 110
168, 180, 190 Taring 17, 31
Series 209 Taring options 115
Series weighings 138 Task 56, 63
Service 56 Task status 62
SERVICE method 55, 127 Task status window 62
SET1 method 57, 127 Tasks 62
SET2 method 58, 128 Technical Data 243
Settings Temperature criterion 120
Adjustment 43 Terminal 88
System 40 Test 42
Tests 43 Test history 70
User 82 Test records 122
Simple weighing 31 Test report 71
Single-use weighing pan 35 Test Results 70
Sinker 193 Test sequence 45, 46, 47,
SmartGrid 25 55, 62, 63,
SmartGrid weighing pan 14 124
SmartGrid cover 35 Test tolerances 47
SmartGrid weighing pan Test weight 44, 45, 50,
SmartGrid 14 53, 54, 57,
SmartScan™ 232 58, 126, 127,
SmartSens 16, 112, 148, 127, 127, 128
168, 180, 190 Weight 44
SmartTrac Test weights 47
69
272 Index
Testing the adjustment with an Weight value 19
external test weight
Testing the adjustment with 122 Z
external test weight Zero point 31
Testing the adjustment with 121 Zeroing 17, 31
internal weight
Tests 43
Time 18, 73
Titration 232
Titration application 232
Tolerances 47, 68
Tolerances s 51, 53
Touch screen adjustment 90
Touch screen touch function 90
Touchscreen 18
Transfer key 104
Transport over long distances 36
Transport over short distances 36
Transporting the balance 36
U
Underload 240
Unit 186
Units of measurement 263
Unpacking the balance 24
User 76, 80, 85
User data 85
User ID 87
User name 86
User names 85
User password 87
User profile 16, 20, 82,
86, 91
User profiles 78, 80
User-specific settings 21, 82
V
Version number 45
Visual feedback 90
W
Warning dialog 60
Warning mode 60
Weighing application 93, 114
Weighing mode 84, 84
Weighing out 138
Weighing parameters 83
Weighing protocols 107, 147
Weighing result 91, 99, 114
Weighing results 118
Weighing unit 19, 99
Weighing with RFID 236
Weighing-in 117, 182
Weighing-in aid
SmartTrac 118, 139,
157, 173, 182
Weight
Test weight 44
Index 273
www.mt.com/excellence
For more information
Mettler-Toledo AG, Laboratory & Weighing Technologies

CH-8606 Greifensee, Switzerland
Tel. +41 (0)44 944 22 11
Fax +41 (0)44 944 30 60
www.mt.com
Subject to technical changes.

© Mettler-Toledo AG 11/2013
30089502B en
*30089502*

OI XPE Analytical Balances en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OI XPE Analytical Balances en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OI XPE Analytical Balances en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions Excellence Analytical Balances

1.1 The following conventions apply to these operating instructions

These symbols indicate an instruction:

Attention (no symbol)

Note (no symbol)

2.2 Product safety information

General safety information

Risk of electric shock

Damage to the balance

Design and Function 15

16 Design and Function

8 Configuration For displaying menus for the configuration of a current applica­

Design and Function 17

1 System connection (terminal cable) 2 Foot screw

Do not touch the touch screen with pointed or sharp objects!

18 Design and Function

3.2.2 Input dialog boxes

3.2.2.1 Text and number entry

Design and Function 19

20 Design and Function

Design and Function 21

22 Design and Function

Remember IDs and passwords!

1 Enter your ID.

Design and Function 23

1 Remove the lifting strap (1).

1 Remove the operating instructions (3).

24 Design and Function

1 Place the terminal at the front of the balance.

1 Place the balance with the terminal at the site of use.

● Set with draft-shield doors and terminal support

Installation and Putting into Operation 25

Further information can by found in Weighing the Right Way.

4.4 Assembling the balance

1 Insert the SmartGrid from the front.

26 Installation and Putting into Operation

The handles (A) must be folded outwards to mount the side

Installation and Putting into Operation 27

1 Insert the terminal support.

1 Mount the terminal.

4.5 Draft shield intermediate shelf

28 Installation and Putting into Operation

2 Position the intermediate XPE2

shelf at the required height

door (1). See Assembling w.m

the balance (page 26). 3

4.6 Connecting the balance

Risk of electric shock

Installation and Putting into Operation 29

The balance performs a self-test after connection to the power

4.7 Setting up the balance

4.7.1 Weighing for the first time

4.7.1.1 Switching on the balance

4.7.1.2 Leveling the balance

30 Installation and Putting into Operation

4.7.1.3 Performing a simple weighing

4.7.2 Operating the glass draft shield

Installation and Putting into Operation 31

Manual door operation

8 Configuration For displaying menus for the configuration of a current applica

Administrator Configuration of the security system of the balance with alloca